OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [or1ksim/] [doc/] [texinfo.tex] - Blame information for rev 566

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 19 jeremybenn
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2 82 jeremybenn
%
3 19 jeremybenn
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5
%
6 82 jeremybenn
\def\texinfoversion{2009-08-14.15}
7 19 jeremybenn
%
8 82 jeremybenn
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9 19 jeremybenn
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
10 82 jeremybenn
% 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
11 19 jeremybenn
%
12
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
13
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
15
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
16
%
17
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
20
% General Public License for more details.
21
%
22
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23
% along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
24
%
25
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
26
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
27
% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
28
%
29
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
30
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
31
%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
32
%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
33
%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
34
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
35
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
36
%
37
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
38
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
39
% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
40
%
41
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
42
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
43
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
44
%   tex foo.texi
45
%   texindex foo.??
46
%   tex foo.texi
47
%   tex foo.texi
48
%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
49
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
50
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
51
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
52
%
53
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
54
% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
55
% full Texinfo distribution.
56
%
57
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
58
 
59
 
60
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
61
 
62
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
63
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
64
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
65
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
66
  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
67
 
68
 
69
\chardef\other=12
70
 
71
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
72
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
73
\let\+ = \relax
74
 
75
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
76
\let\ptexb=\b
77
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
78
\let\ptexc=\c
79
\let\ptexcomma=\,
80
\let\ptexdot=\.
81
\let\ptexdots=\dots
82
\let\ptexend=\end
83
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
84
\let\ptexexclam=\!
85
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
86
\let\ptexgtr=>
87
\let\ptexhat=^
88
\let\ptexi=\i
89
\let\ptexindent=\indent
90
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
91
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
92
\let\ptexless=<
93
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
94
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
95
\let\ptexplus=+
96
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
97
\let\ptexslash=\/
98
\let\ptexstar=\*
99
\let\ptext=\t
100 82 jeremybenn
\let\ptextop=\top
101
{\catcode`\'=\active
102
\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
103
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
104 19 jeremybenn
 
105
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
106
% starts a new line in the output.
107
\newlinechar = `^^J
108
 
109
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
110
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
111
%
112
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
113
  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
114
\else
115
  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
116
\fi
117
 
118
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
119
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
120
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
121
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
122
\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
123
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
124
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
125
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
126
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
127
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
128
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
129
\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
130
\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
131
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
132
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
133
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
134
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
135
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
136
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
137
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
138
%
139
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
140
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
141
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
142
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
143
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
144
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
145
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
146
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
147
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
148
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
149
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
150
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
151
%
152
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
153
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
154
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
155
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
156
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
157
 
158
% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
159
\chardef\spacecat = 10
160
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
161
 
162
% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
163
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
164
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
165
\chardef\dashChar  = `\-
166
\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
167
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
168
\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
169
\chardef\questChar = `\?
170
\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
171
\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
172
\chardef\underChar = `\_
173
 
174
% Ignore a token.
175
%
176
\def\gobble#1{}
177
 
178
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
179
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
180
 
181
% Hyphenation fixes.
182
\hyphenation{
183
  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
184
  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
185
  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
186
  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
187
  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
188
  spell-ing spell-ings
189
  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
190
  wide-spread wrap-around
191
}
192
 
193
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
194
\newdimen\bindingoffset
195
\newdimen\normaloffset
196
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
197
 
198
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
199
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
200
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
201
%
202
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
203
 
204
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
205
% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
206
% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
207
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
208
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
209
%
210
\def\|{%
211
  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
212
  \leavevmode
213
  %
214
  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
215
  \vadjust{%
216
    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
217
    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
218
    \vskip-\baselineskip
219
    %
220
    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
221
    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
222
    \llap{%
223
      %
224
      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
225
      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
226
      %
227
      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
228
      \hskip 12pt
229
    }%
230
  }%
231
}
232
 
233
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
234
% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
235
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
236
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
237
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
238
%
239
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
240
\def\loggingall{%
241
  \tracingstats2
242
  \tracingpages1
243
  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
244
  \tracingparagraphs1
245
  \tracingoutput1
246
  \tracingmacros2
247
  \tracingrestores1
248
  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
249
  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
250
    \tracingscantokens1
251
    \tracingifs1
252
    \tracinggroups1
253
    \tracingnesting2
254
    \tracingassigns1
255
  \fi
256
  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
257
  \errorcontextlines16
258
}%
259
 
260
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
261
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
262
%
263
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
264
  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
265
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
266
  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
267
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
268
  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
269
 
270
% For @cropmarks command.
271
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
272
%
273
\newif\ifcropmarks
274
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
275
%
276
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
277
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
278
%
279
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
280
\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
281
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
282
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
283
 
284
% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
285
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
286
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
287
%
288
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
289
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
290
%
291
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
292
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
293
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.  The solution is
294
% described on page 260 of The TeXbook.  It involves outputting two
295
% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
296
% one after.  I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
297
\def\domark{%
298
  \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
299
  \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
300
  \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
301
  \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
302
  \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
303
  \mark{%
304
                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2
305
      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
306
    \noexpand\else \the\toks8
307
  }%
308
}
309
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
310
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
311
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
312
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
313
% first @chapter.
314
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
315
  \ifcase0\topmark\fi
316
  \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
317
}
318
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
319
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
320
 
321
% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
322
\def\lastchapterdefs{}
323
\def\lastsectiondefs{}
324
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
325
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
326
\def\lastcolordefs{}
327
 
328
% Main output routine.
329
\chardef\PAGE = 255
330
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
331
 
332
\newbox\headlinebox
333
\newbox\footlinebox
334
 
335
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
336
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
337
\def\onepageout#1{%
338
  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
339
  %
340
  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
341
  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
342
  %
343
  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
344
  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
345
  \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
346
  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
347
  \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
348
  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
349
  %
350
  {%
351
    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
352
    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
353
    % before the \shipout runs.
354
    %
355
    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
356
    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
357
               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
358
               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
359
               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
360
               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
361 82 jeremybenn
               % it needs to be
362 19 jeremybenn
               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
363
    \shipout\vbox{%
364
      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
365
      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
366
      %
367
      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
368
        \hsize = \outerhsize
369
        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
370
        \vtop to0pt{%
371
          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
372
          \nointerlineskip
373
          \line{%
374
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
375
            \hfill
376
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
377
          }%
378
          \vss}%
379
        \vskip\topandbottommargin
380
        \line\bgroup
381
          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
382
          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
383
          \vbox\bgroup
384
      \fi
385
      %
386
      \unvbox\headlinebox
387
      \pagebody{#1}%
388
      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
389
        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
390
        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
391
        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
392
        \vskip 24pt
393
        \unvbox\footlinebox
394
      \fi
395
      %
396
      \ifcropmarks
397
          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
398
        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
399
        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
400
        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
401
        \vbox to0pt{\vss
402
          \line{%
403
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
404
            \hfill
405
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
406
          }%
407
          \nointerlineskip
408
          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
409
        }%
410
      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
411
      \fi
412
    }% end of \shipout\vbox
413
  }% end of group with \indexdummies
414
  \advancepageno
415
  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
416
}
417
 
418
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
419
 
420
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
421
{\catcode`\@ =11
422
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
423
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
424
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
425
  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
426
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
427
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
428
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
429
}
430
 
431
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
432
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
433
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
434
%
435
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
436
\def\nstop{\vbox
437
  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
438
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
439
\def\nsbot{\vbox
440
  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
441
 
442
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
443
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
444
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
445
%
446
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
447
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
448
  \def\argtorun{#2}%
449
  \begingroup
450
    \obeylines
451
    \spaceisspace
452
    #1%
453
    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
454
}
455
 
456
{\obeylines %
457
  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
458
    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
459
    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
460
  }%
461
}
462
 
463
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
464
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
465
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
466
 
467 82 jeremybenn
% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
468 19 jeremybenn
%
469
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
470
%    @end itemize  @c foo
471
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
472
% by \finishparsearg.
473
%
474
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
475
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
476
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
477
  \def\temp{#3}%
478
  \ifx\temp\empty
479
    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
480
    \let\temp\finishparsearg
481
  \else
482
    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
483
  \fi
484
  % Put the space token in:
485
  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
486
}
487
 
488
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
489
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
490
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
491
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
492 82 jeremybenn
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
493 19 jeremybenn
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
494
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
495
%
496
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
497
%
498
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
499
 
500
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
501
%       is roughly equivalent to
502
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
503
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
504
%
505
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
506
% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
507
 
508
\def\parseargdef#1{%
509
  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
510
}
511
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
512
  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
513
  \def#1##1%
514
}
515
 
516
% Several utility definitions with active space:
517
{
518
  \obeyspaces
519
  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
520
 
521
  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
522
  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
523
  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
524
  % should produce a line of output anyway.
525
  %
526
  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
527
 
528
  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
529
  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
530
  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
531
  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
532
}
533
 
534
 
535
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
536
 
537
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
538
%
539
%   \envdef\foo{...}
540
%   \def\Efoo{...}
541
%
542
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
543
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
544
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
545
% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
546
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
547
%
548
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
549 82 jeremybenn
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
550 19 jeremybenn
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
551
% special case.)
552
 
553
 
554 82 jeremybenn
% At run-time, environments start with this:
555 19 jeremybenn
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
556
% initialize
557
\let\thisenv\empty
558
 
559
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
560
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
561
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
562
 
563
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
564
\def\checkenv#1{%
565
  \def\temp{#1}%
566
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
567
  \else
568
    \badenverr
569
  \fi
570
}
571
 
572 82 jeremybenn
% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
573 19 jeremybenn
\def\badenverr{%
574
  \errhelp = \EMsimple
575
  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
576
    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
577
}
578
\def\inenvironment#1{%
579
  \ifx#1\empty
580
    out of any environment%
581
  \else
582
    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
583
  \fi
584
}
585
 
586
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
587
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
588
%
589
\parseargdef\end{%
590
  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
591
  \else
592
    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
593
    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
594
    \csname E#1\endcsname
595
    \endgroup
596
  \fi
597
}
598
 
599
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
600
 
601
 
602
%% Simple single-character @ commands
603
 
604
% @@ prints an @
605
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
606
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
607
 
608
% This is turned off because it was never documented
609
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
610
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
611
%% but suppressing ligatures.
612
%\def\`{{`}}
613
%\def\'{{'}}
614
 
615
% Used to generate quoted braces.
616
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
617
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
618
\let\{=\mylbrace
619
\let\}=\myrbrace
620
\begingroup
621
  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
622
  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
623
  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
624
  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
625
  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
626
  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
627
  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
628
  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
629
  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
630
!endgroup
631
 
632
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
633
\let\comma = ,
634
 
635
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
636
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
637
\let\, = \c
638
\let\dotaccent = \.
639
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
640
\let\tieaccent = \t
641
\let\ubaraccent = \b
642
\let\udotaccent = \d
643
 
644
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
645
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
646
\def\questiondown{?`}
647
\def\exclamdown{!`}
648
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
649
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
650
 
651
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
652
\def\imacro{i}
653
\def\jmacro{j}
654
\def\dotless#1{%
655
  \def\temp{#1}%
656 82 jeremybenn
  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
657
  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
658 19 jeremybenn
  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
659
  \fi\fi
660
}
661
 
662
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
663
% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
664
%
665
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
666
 
667
% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
668
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
669
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
670
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
671
% \scriptscriptstyle).
672
%
673
\def\LaTeX{%
674
  L\kern-.36em
675
  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
676
   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
677
  \kern-.15em
678
  \TeX
679
}
680
 
681
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
682
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
683
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
684
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
685
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
686
{\catcode`@ = 11
687
 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
688
 % if the definition is written into an index file.
689
 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
690
 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
691
}
692
 
693
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
694
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
695
 
696
% @* forces a line break.
697
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
698
 
699
% @/ allows a line break.
700
\let\/=\allowbreak
701
 
702
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
703
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
704
 
705
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
706
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
707
 
708
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
709
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
710
 
711
% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
712 82 jeremybenn
%
713 19 jeremybenn
\def\onword{on}
714
\def\offword{off}
715
%
716
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
717
  \def\temp{#1}%
718
  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
719
  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
720
  \else
721
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
722
    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
723
  \fi\fi
724
}
725
 
726
% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
727
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
728
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
729
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
730
 
731
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
732
% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
733
% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
734
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
735
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
736
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
737
% the text is small, which looks bad.
738
%
739
% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
740
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
741
% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
742
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
743
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
744
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
745
%
746
\newbox\groupbox
747
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
748
%
749
\envdef\group{%
750
  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
751
    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
752
    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
753
  \fi
754
  \startsavinginserts
755
  %
756
  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
757
    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
758
    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
759
    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
760
    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
761
    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
762
    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
763
    \comment
764
}
765
%
766
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
767
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
768
% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
769
% above.  But it's pretty close.
770
\def\Egroup{%
771
    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
772
    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
773
    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
774
    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
775
  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
776
  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
777
  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
778
  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
779
  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
780
  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
781
  % group, force a page break.
782
  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
783
    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
784
      \page
785
    \fi
786
  \fi
787
  \box\groupbox
788
  \prevdepth = \dimen1
789
  \checkinserts
790
}
791
%
792
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
793
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
794
%
795
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
796
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
797
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
798
 
799
% @need space-in-mils
800
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
801
 
802
\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
803
 
804
% Old definition--didn't work.
805
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
806
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
807
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
808
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
809
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
810
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
811
%}}
812
 
813
\parseargdef\need{%
814
  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
815
  % paragraph.
816
  \par
817
  %
818
  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
819
  \dimen0 = #1\mil
820
  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
821
  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
822
  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
823
    %
824
    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
825
    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
826
    % And a page break here is fine.
827
    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
828
    %
829
    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
830
    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
831
    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
832
    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
833
    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
834
    %
835
    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
836
    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
837
    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
838
    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
839
    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
840
    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
841
    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
842
    \penalty9999
843
    %
844
    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
845
    \kern -#1\mil
846
    %
847
    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
848
    \nobreak
849
  \fi
850
}
851
 
852
% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
853
 
854
\let\br = \par
855
 
856
% @page forces the start of a new page.
857
%
858
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
859
 
860
% @exdent text....
861
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
862
 
863
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
864
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
865
\newskip\exdentamount
866
 
867
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
868
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
869
 
870
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
871
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
872
  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
873
 
874
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
875
% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
876
% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
877
%
878
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
879
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
880
%
881
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
882
  \nobreak
883
  \kern-\strutdepth
884
  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
885
    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
886
    \vss
887
    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
888
    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
889
    \ifx#1l%
890
      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
891
    \else
892
      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
893
    \fi
894
    \null
895
  }%
896
}}
897
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
898
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
899
%
900
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
901
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
902
% else use TEXT for both).
903
%
904
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
905
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
906
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
907
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
908
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
909
    \def\righttext{#2}%
910
  \else
911
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
912
    \def\righttext{#1}%
913
  \fi
914
  %
915
  \ifodd\pageno
916
    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
917
  \else
918
    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
919
  \fi
920
  \temp
921
}
922
 
923 82 jeremybenn
% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
924 19 jeremybenn
%
925
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
926
\def\includezzz#1{%
927
  \pushthisfilestack
928
  \def\thisfile{#1}%
929
  {%
930 82 jeremybenn
    \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
931
    \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
932
    \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
933
    \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
934
    %
935
    % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
936
    % definitions, etc.
937 19 jeremybenn
    \expandafter
938
  }\temp
939
  \popthisfilestack
940
}
941
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
942
  \catcode`\\=\other
943
  \catcode`~=\other
944
  \catcode`^=\other
945
  \catcode`_=\other
946
  \catcode`|=\other
947
  \catcode`<=\other
948
  \catcode`>=\other
949
  \catcode`+=\other
950
  \catcode`-=\other
951 82 jeremybenn
  \catcode`\`=\other
952
  \catcode`\'=\other
953 19 jeremybenn
}
954
 
955
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
956
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
957
}
958
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
959
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
960
}
961
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
962
  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
963
}
964
 
965
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
966
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
967
  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
968
 
969
\def\thisfile{}
970
 
971
% @center line
972
% outputs that line, centered.
973
%
974
\parseargdef\center{%
975
  \ifhmode
976
    \let\next\centerH
977
  \else
978
    \let\next\centerV
979
  \fi
980
  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
981
}
982
\def\centerH#1{%
983
  {%
984
    \hfil\break
985
    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
986
    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
987
    \line{#1}%
988
    \break
989
  }%
990
}
991
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
992
 
993
% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
994
 
995
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
996
 
997
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
998
% @c is the same as @comment
999
% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
1000
 
1001
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
1002
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
1003
\commentxxx}
1004
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
1005
 
1006
\let\c=\comment
1007
 
1008
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
1009
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
1010
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
1011
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
1012
%
1013
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
1014
\def\noneword{none}
1015
%
1016
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
1017
  \def\temp{#1}%
1018
  \ifx\temp\asisword
1019
  \else
1020
    \ifx\temp\noneword
1021
      \defaultparindent = 0pt
1022
    \else
1023
      \defaultparindent = #1em
1024
    \fi
1025
  \fi
1026
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
1027
}
1028
 
1029
% @exampleindent NCHARS
1030
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
1031
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
1032
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
1033
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
1034
  \def\temp{#1}%
1035
  \ifx\temp\asisword
1036
  \else
1037
    \ifx\temp\noneword
1038
      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
1039
    \else
1040
      \lispnarrowing = #1em
1041
    \fi
1042
  \fi
1043
}
1044
 
1045
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
1046
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
1047
% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
1048
% paragraphs.
1049
%
1050
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
1051
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
1052
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
1053
% By default, we suppress indentation.
1054
%
1055
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
1056
\def\insertword{insert}
1057
%
1058
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
1059
  \def\temp{#1}%
1060
  \ifx\temp\noneword
1061
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
1062
  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
1063
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
1064
  \else
1065
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1066
    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1067
  \fi\fi
1068
}
1069
 
1070
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
1071
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1072
%
1073
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1074
% paragraph.
1075
%
1076
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1077
  \gdef\indent{%
1078
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1079
    \indent
1080
  }%
1081
  \gdef\noindent{%
1082
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1083
    \noindent
1084
  }%
1085
  \global\everypar = {%
1086
    \kern -\parindent
1087
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1088
  }%
1089
}
1090
 
1091
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1092
  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1093
  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1094
  \global \everypar = {}%
1095
}
1096
 
1097
 
1098
% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
1099
%
1100
\def\asis#1{#1}
1101
 
1102
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
1103
%
1104
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
1105
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
1106
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
1107
% which is what @var uses.
1108
{
1109
  \catcode`\_ = \active
1110
  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
1111
    \catcode`\_=\active
1112
    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
1113
  }
1114
}
1115
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
1116
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
1117
% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
1118
% otherwise define @\.
1119
%
1120
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
1121
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1122
%
1123
\def\math{%
1124
  \tex
1125
  \mathunderscore
1126
  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
1127
  \mathactive
1128 82 jeremybenn
  % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
1129
  \let\"=\ddot
1130
  \let\'=\acute
1131
  \let\==\bar
1132
  \let\^=\hat
1133
  \let\`=\grave
1134
  \let\u=\breve
1135
  \let\v=\check
1136
  \let\~=\tilde
1137
  \let\dotaccent=\dot
1138 19 jeremybenn
  $\finishmath
1139
}
1140
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
1141
 
1142
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
1143
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
1144
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
1145
%
1146
{
1147
  \catcode`^ = \active
1148
  \catcode`< = \active
1149
  \catcode`> = \active
1150
  \catcode`+ = \active
1151 82 jeremybenn
  \catcode`' = \active
1152 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef\mathactive{%
1153
    \let^ = \ptexhat
1154
    \let< = \ptexless
1155
    \let> = \ptexgtr
1156
    \let+ = \ptexplus
1157 82 jeremybenn
    \let' = \ptexquoteright
1158 19 jeremybenn
  }
1159
}
1160
 
1161 82 jeremybenn
% Some math mode symbols.
1162 19 jeremybenn
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
1163 82 jeremybenn
\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
1164
\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
1165
\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
1166 19 jeremybenn
 
1167
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
1168
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
1169
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
1170
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
1171
% whichever is larger.
1172
%
1173
\def\dots{%
1174
  \leavevmode
1175
  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
1176
  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
1177
    \dimen0 = \wd0
1178
  \else
1179
    \dimen0 = 1.5em
1180
  \fi
1181
  \hbox to \dimen0{%
1182
    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
1183
    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
1184
    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
1185
    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
1186
  }%
1187
}
1188
 
1189
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1190
%
1191
\def\enddots{%
1192
  \dots
1193
  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
1194
}
1195
 
1196
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
1197
% Texinfo's parsing.
1198
%
1199
\let\comma = ,
1200
 
1201
% @refill is a no-op.
1202
\let\refill=\relax
1203
 
1204
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1205
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1206
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1207
%
1208
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1209
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1210
 
1211
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1212
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1213
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1214
\def\setfilename{%
1215
   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1216
   \iflinks
1217
     \tryauxfile
1218
     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1219
     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1220
   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1221
   \openindices
1222
   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1223
   %
1224
   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1225
   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1226
   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1227
   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1228
   \closein 1
1229
   %
1230
   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1231
}
1232
 
1233
% Called from \setfilename.
1234
%
1235
\def\openindices{%
1236
  \newindex{cp}%
1237
  \newcodeindex{fn}%
1238
  \newcodeindex{vr}%
1239
  \newcodeindex{tp}%
1240
  \newcodeindex{ky}%
1241
  \newcodeindex{pg}%
1242
}
1243
 
1244
% @bye.
1245
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1246
 
1247
 
1248
\message{pdf,}
1249
% adobe `portable' document format
1250
\newcount\tempnum
1251
\newcount\lnkcount
1252
\newtoks\filename
1253
\newcount\filenamelength
1254
\newcount\pgn
1255
\newtoks\toksA
1256
\newtoks\toksB
1257
\newtoks\toksC
1258
\newtoks\toksD
1259
\newbox\boxA
1260
\newcount\countA
1261
\newif\ifpdf
1262
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1263
 
1264
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1265
% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
1266
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
1267
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
1268
\else
1269
  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1270
  \else
1271
    \ifcase\pdfoutput
1272
    \else
1273
      \pdftrue
1274
    \fi
1275
  \fi
1276
\fi
1277
 
1278
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1279
% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
1280
% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1281
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
1282
% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
1283
% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
1284
% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1285
% that's what we do).
1286
 
1287
% double active backslashes.
1288 82 jeremybenn
%
1289 19 jeremybenn
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
1290
 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
1291
   @catcode`@\=@active
1292
   @let\=@doublebackslash}
1293
}
1294
 
1295
% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
1296
% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
1297
% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
1298
% changes for Texinfo.  It is included here under the GPL by permission
1299
% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
1300 82 jeremybenn
%
1301 19 jeremybenn
% #1 is the tokens to replace.
1302
% #2 is the replacement.
1303
% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
1304 82 jeremybenn
%
1305 19 jeremybenn
\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
1306
  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
1307
    ##1%
1308
    \ifx\\##2\\%
1309
    \else
1310
      #2%
1311
      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
1312
        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
1313
      }%
1314
    \fi
1315
  }%
1316
  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
1317
}
1318
\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
1319
 
1320
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
1321
\def\backslashparens#1{%
1322
  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
1323
             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
1324
  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
1325
  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
1326
}
1327
 
1328
\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1329
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
1330
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1331
output) for that.)}
1332
 
1333
\ifpdf
1334
  %
1335 82 jeremybenn
  % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
1336
  % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1337
  % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1338
  % of actual black.
1339
  \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1340
  \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1341 19 jeremybenn
  %
1342 82 jeremybenn
  % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1343
  % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1344
  \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg  #1 RG}}
1345
  %
1346 19 jeremybenn
  % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1347
  % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1348
  \def\setcolor#1{%
1349
    \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1350
    \domark
1351
    \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
1352
  }
1353
  %
1354 82 jeremybenn
  \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1355 19 jeremybenn
  \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1356
  \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1357
  \def\lastcolordefs{}
1358
  %
1359
  \def\makefootline{%
1360
    \baselineskip24pt
1361
    \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1362
  }
1363
  %
1364
  \def\makeheadline{%
1365
    \vbox to 0pt{%
1366
      \vskip-22.5pt
1367
      \line{%
1368
        \vbox to8.5pt{}%
1369
        % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1370
        \getcolormarks
1371
        % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1372
        \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1373
      }%
1374
      \vss
1375
    }%
1376
    \nointerlineskip
1377
  }
1378
  %
1379
  %
1380
  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
1381
  %
1382
  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1383
  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1384
    \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1385
    \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1386
    %
1387
    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
1388
    % others).  Let's try in that order.
1389
    \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1390
    \begingroup
1391
      \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1392
        \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1393
          \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1394
            \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1395
              \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1396 82 jeremybenn
                \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1397
                  \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1398
                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1399
                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
1400
                \fi
1401 19 jeremybenn
              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1402
              \fi
1403
            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1404
            \fi
1405
          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1406
          \fi
1407
        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1408
        \fi
1409
      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1410
      \fi
1411
      \closein 1
1412
    \endgroup
1413
    %
1414 82 jeremybenn
    % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1415 19 jeremybenn
    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1416
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1417
      \immediate\pdfimage
1418
    \else
1419
      \immediate\pdfximage
1420
    \fi
1421
      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
1422
      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
1423
      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1424
         #1.\pdfimgext
1425
       \else
1426
         {#1.\pdfimgext}%
1427
       \fi
1428
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1429
      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1430
    \fi}
1431
  %
1432
  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1433
    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1434
    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1435
    \indexnofonts
1436
    \turnoffactive
1437
    \activebackslashdouble
1438
    \makevalueexpandable
1439
    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1440
    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
1441
    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1442
  }}
1443
  %
1444
  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1445
  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1446
  %
1447
  % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
1448
  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
1449 82 jeremybenn
  \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1450
  \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1451 19 jeremybenn
  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1452
  %
1453
  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1454
  % come from Petr Olsak
1455
  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1456
    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1457
  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1458
    \advance\tempnum by 1
1459
    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1460
  %
1461
  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1462
  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1463
  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
1464
  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1465
  % #4 is the page number
1466
  %
1467
  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1468
    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1469
    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
1470
    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1471
    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1472
    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1473
    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1474
      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1475
    \else
1476
      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
1477
      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1478
       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
1479
    \fi
1480
    %
1481
    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
1482
    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1483
     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
1484
    %
1485
    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1486
  }
1487
  %
1488
  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1489
    \begingroup
1490
      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1491
      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
1492
      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
1493
      %
1494
      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1495
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1496
        \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1497
        \def\thissecnum{0}%
1498
        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1499
      }%
1500
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1501
        \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1502
        \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1503
        \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1504
      }%
1505
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1506
        \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1507
        \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1508
      }%
1509
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1510
        \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1511
      }%
1512
      \def\thischapnum{0}%
1513
      \def\thissecnum{0}%
1514
      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1515
      %
1516
      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1517
      % al. a second time, below.
1518
      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1519
      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1520
      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1521
      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1522
      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1523
      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1524
      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1525
      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1526
      \readdatafile{toc}%
1527
      %
1528
      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1529
      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1530
      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1531
      %
1532
      % We use the node names as the destinations.
1533
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1534
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1535
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1536
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1537
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1538
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1539
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1540
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1541
      %
1542
      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1543
      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1544
      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
1545
      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
1546
      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1547
      %
1548
      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1549
      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
1550
      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
1551
      \indexnofonts
1552
      \setupdatafile
1553
      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1554
      \input \tocreadfilename
1555
    \endgroup
1556
  }
1557
  %
1558
  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1559
    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1560
    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1561
      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1562
        \advance\filenamelength by 1
1563
      \fi
1564
    \fi
1565
    \nextsp}
1566
  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1567
  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1568
    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1569
  \else
1570
    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1571
  \fi
1572
  % make a live url in pdf output.
1573
  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1574
    \begingroup
1575
      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1576
      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1577
      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1578
      % people have actually reported a problem with.
1579 82 jeremybenn
      %
1580 19 jeremybenn
      \normalturnoffactive
1581
      \def\@{@}%
1582
      \let\/=\empty
1583
      \makevalueexpandable
1584 82 jeremybenn
      % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1585
      % special-casing \var here?
1586
      \def\var##1{##1}%
1587
      %
1588 19 jeremybenn
      \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1589
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1590
        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1591
    \endgroup}
1592
  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1593
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1594
  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1595
  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1596
  \def\maketoks{%
1597
    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1598
    \ifx\first0\adn0
1599
    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1600
    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1601
    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1602
    \else
1603
      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1604
      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1605
        \let\next=\maketoks
1606
        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1607
        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1608
      \fi
1609
    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1610
    \next}
1611
  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1612
    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1613
  \def\pdflink#1{%
1614
    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1615
    \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
1616
  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1617
\else
1618 82 jeremybenn
  % non-pdf mode
1619 19 jeremybenn
  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1620
  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1621
  \let\endlink = \relax
1622
  \let\setcolor = \gobble
1623
  \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
1624
  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1625
\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
1626
 
1627
 
1628
\message{fonts,}
1629
 
1630
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1631
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1632
% italics, not bold italics.
1633
%
1634
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
1635
  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1636
  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
1637
}
1638
 
1639
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1640
%
1641
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1642
 
1643
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1644
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1645
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1646
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1647
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1648
 
1649 82 jeremybenn
% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
1650
% in those cases "rm" is bold.  Sigh.
1651
\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
1652
 
1653 19 jeremybenn
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1654
% So we set up a \sf.
1655
\newfam\sffam
1656
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1657
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1658
 
1659
% We don't need math for this font style.
1660
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1661
 
1662
 
1663
% Default leading.
1664
\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
1665
 
1666
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1667
% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1668
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1669
%
1670
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1671
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1672
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1673
%
1674
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1675
\def\baselinefactor{1}
1676
%
1677
\def\setleading#1{%
1678
  \dimen0 = #1\relax
1679
  \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
1680
  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1681
  \normalbaselines
1682
  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1683
    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1684
                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1685
  }%
1686
}
1687
 
1688
% PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1689
%
1690
% do nothing with this by default.
1691
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
1692
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
1693
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
1694
 
1695
% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1696
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1697
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1698
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
1699
  \begingroup
1700
    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1701
    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1702
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1703
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1704
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1705
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1706
%%Version: 1.000
1707
%%EndComments
1708
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1709
12 dict begin
1710
begincmap
1711
/CIDSystemInfo
1712
<< /Registry (TeX)
1713
/Ordering (OT1)
1714
/Supplement 0
1715
>> def
1716
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
1717
/CMapType 2 def
1718
1 begincodespacerange
1719
<00> <7F>
1720
endcodespacerange
1721
8 beginbfrange
1722
<00> <01> <0393>
1723
<09> <0A> <03A8>
1724
<23> <26> <0023>
1725
<28> <3B> <0028>
1726
<3F> <5B> <003F>
1727
<5D> <5E> <005D>
1728
<61> <7A> <0061>
1729
<7B> <7C> <2013>
1730
endbfrange
1731
40 beginbfchar
1732
<02> <0398>
1733
<03> <039B>
1734
<04> <039E>
1735
<05> <03A0>
1736
<06> <03A3>
1737
<07> <03D2>
1738
<08> <03A6>
1739
<0B> <00660066>
1740
<0C> <00660069>
1741
<0D> <0066006C>
1742
<0E> <006600660069>
1743
<0F> <00660066006C>
1744
<10> <0131>
1745
<11> <0237>
1746
<12> <0060>
1747
<13> <00B4>
1748
<14> <02C7>
1749
<15> <02D8>
1750
<16> <00AF>
1751
<17> <02DA>
1752
<18> <00B8>
1753
<19> <00DF>
1754
<1A> <00E6>
1755
<1B> <0153>
1756
<1C> <00F8>
1757
<1D> <00C6>
1758
<1E> <0152>
1759
<1F> <00D8>
1760
<21> <0021>
1761
<22> <201D>
1762
<27> <2019>
1763
<3C> <00A1>
1764
<3D> <003D>
1765
<3E> <00BF>
1766
<5C> <201C>
1767
<5F> <02D9>
1768
<60> <2018>
1769
<7D> <02DD>
1770
<7E> <007E>
1771
<7F> <00A8>
1772
endbfchar
1773
endcmap
1774
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1775
end
1776
end
1777
%%EndResource
1778
%%EOF
1779
    }\endgroup
1780
  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
1781
    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1782
  }%
1783
%
1784
% \cmapOT1IT
1785
  \begingroup
1786
    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1787
    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1788
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1789
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1790
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1791
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1792
%%Version: 1.000
1793
%%EndComments
1794
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1795
12 dict begin
1796
begincmap
1797
/CIDSystemInfo
1798
<< /Registry (TeX)
1799
/Ordering (OT1IT)
1800
/Supplement 0
1801
>> def
1802
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
1803
/CMapType 2 def
1804
1 begincodespacerange
1805
<00> <7F>
1806
endcodespacerange
1807
8 beginbfrange
1808
<00> <01> <0393>
1809
<09> <0A> <03A8>
1810
<25> <26> <0025>
1811
<28> <3B> <0028>
1812
<3F> <5B> <003F>
1813
<5D> <5E> <005D>
1814
<61> <7A> <0061>
1815
<7B> <7C> <2013>
1816
endbfrange
1817
42 beginbfchar
1818
<02> <0398>
1819
<03> <039B>
1820
<04> <039E>
1821
<05> <03A0>
1822
<06> <03A3>
1823
<07> <03D2>
1824
<08> <03A6>
1825
<0B> <00660066>
1826
<0C> <00660069>
1827
<0D> <0066006C>
1828
<0E> <006600660069>
1829
<0F> <00660066006C>
1830
<10> <0131>
1831
<11> <0237>
1832
<12> <0060>
1833
<13> <00B4>
1834
<14> <02C7>
1835
<15> <02D8>
1836
<16> <00AF>
1837
<17> <02DA>
1838
<18> <00B8>
1839
<19> <00DF>
1840
<1A> <00E6>
1841
<1B> <0153>
1842
<1C> <00F8>
1843
<1D> <00C6>
1844
<1E> <0152>
1845
<1F> <00D8>
1846
<21> <0021>
1847
<22> <201D>
1848
<23> <0023>
1849
<24> <00A3>
1850
<27> <2019>
1851
<3C> <00A1>
1852
<3D> <003D>
1853
<3E> <00BF>
1854
<5C> <201C>
1855
<5F> <02D9>
1856
<60> <2018>
1857
<7D> <02DD>
1858
<7E> <007E>
1859
<7F> <00A8>
1860
endbfchar
1861
endcmap
1862
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1863
end
1864
end
1865
%%EndResource
1866
%%EOF
1867
    }\endgroup
1868
  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
1869
    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1870
  }%
1871
%
1872
% \cmapOT1TT
1873
  \begingroup
1874
    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1875
    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1876
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1877
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1878
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
1879
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
1880
%%Version: 1.000
1881
%%EndComments
1882
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1883
12 dict begin
1884
begincmap
1885
/CIDSystemInfo
1886
<< /Registry (TeX)
1887
/Ordering (OT1TT)
1888
/Supplement 0
1889
>> def
1890
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
1891
/CMapType 2 def
1892
1 begincodespacerange
1893
<00> <7F>
1894
endcodespacerange
1895
5 beginbfrange
1896
<00> <01> <0393>
1897
<09> <0A> <03A8>
1898
<21> <26> <0021>
1899
<28> <5F> <0028>
1900
<61> <7E> <0061>
1901
endbfrange
1902
32 beginbfchar
1903
<02> <0398>
1904
<03> <039B>
1905
<04> <039E>
1906
<05> <03A0>
1907
<06> <03A3>
1908
<07> <03D2>
1909
<08> <03A6>
1910
<0B> <2191>
1911
<0C> <2193>
1912
<0D> <0027>
1913
<0E> <00A1>
1914
<0F> <00BF>
1915
<10> <0131>
1916
<11> <0237>
1917
<12> <0060>
1918
<13> <00B4>
1919
<14> <02C7>
1920
<15> <02D8>
1921
<16> <00AF>
1922
<17> <02DA>
1923
<18> <00B8>
1924
<19> <00DF>
1925
<1A> <00E6>
1926
<1B> <0153>
1927
<1C> <00F8>
1928
<1D> <00C6>
1929
<1E> <0152>
1930
<1F> <00D8>
1931
<20> <2423>
1932
<27> <2019>
1933
<60> <2018>
1934
<7F> <00A8>
1935
endbfchar
1936
endcmap
1937
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1938
end
1939
end
1940
%%EndResource
1941
%%EOF
1942
    }\endgroup
1943
  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
1944
    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1945
  }%
1946
\fi\fi
1947
 
1948
 
1949
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1950
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1951
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
1952
% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
1953
% empty to omit).
1954
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
1955
  \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
1956
  \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
1957
}
1958
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
1959
\let\cmap\gobble
1960
% emacs-page end of cmaps
1961
 
1962
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1963
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1964
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1965
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1966
\def\fontprefix{cm}
1967
\fi
1968
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1969
\def\rmshape{r}
1970
\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
1971
\def\bfshape{b}
1972
\def\bxshape{bx}
1973
\def\ttshape{tt}
1974
\def\ttbshape{tt}
1975
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1976
\def\itshape{ti}
1977
\def\itbshape{bxti}
1978
\def\slshape{sl}
1979
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1980
\def\sfshape{ss}
1981
\def\sfbshape{ss}
1982
\def\scshape{csc}
1983
\def\scbshape{csc}
1984
 
1985
% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  This is the default in
1986
% Texinfo.
1987 82 jeremybenn
%
1988 19 jeremybenn
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
1989
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1990
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1991
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1992
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1993
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1994
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1995
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1996
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1997
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1998
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1999
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2000
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
2001
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
2002
\def\textecsize{1095}
2003
 
2004
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
2005
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2006
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2007
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2008
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
2009
 
2010
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
2011
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
2012
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2013
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2014
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2015
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2016
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2017
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2018
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2019
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2020
\font\smalli=cmmi9
2021
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
2022
\def\smallecsize{0900}
2023
 
2024
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
2025
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
2026
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2027
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
2028
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2029
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
2030
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2031
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2032
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2033
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
2034
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
2035
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
2036
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
2037
 
2038
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2039
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
2040
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2041
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
2042
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2043
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
2044
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
2045
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2046
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
2047
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2048
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
2049
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
2050
\def\titleecsize{2074}
2051
 
2052
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
2053
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
2054
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2055
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
2056
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2057
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2058
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
2059
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
2060
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
2061
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2062
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
2063
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
2064
\def\chapecsize{1728}
2065
 
2066
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
2067
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
2068
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2069
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2070
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2071
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2072
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2073
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2074
\let\secbf\secrm
2075
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2076
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2077
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2078
\def\sececsize{1440}
2079
 
2080
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
2081
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
2082
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2083
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
2084
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
2085
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
2086
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
2087
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2088
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2089
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
2090
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
2091
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
2092
\def\ssececsize{1200}
2093
 
2094
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
2095
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
2096
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2097
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2098
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2099
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2100
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2101
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2102
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2103
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2104
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
2105
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
2106
\def\reducedecsize{1000}
2107
 
2108
% reset the current fonts
2109
\textfonts
2110
\rm
2111
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
2112
 
2113
 
2114
% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
2115
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
2116
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
2117
% future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
2118 82 jeremybenn
%
2119 19 jeremybenn
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
2120
% Text fonts (10pt).
2121
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
2122
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
2123
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2124
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2125
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2126
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
2127
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2128
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2129
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2130
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2131
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
2132
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
2133
\def\textecsize{1000}
2134
 
2135
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
2136
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2137
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
2138
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
2139
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
2140
 
2141
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
2142
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
2143
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2144
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2145
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2146
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2147
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2148
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2149
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2150
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2151
\font\smalli=cmmi9
2152
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
2153
\def\smallecsize{0900}
2154
 
2155
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
2156
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
2157
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2158
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
2159
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2160
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
2161
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2162
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2163
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2164
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
2165
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
2166
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
2167
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
2168
 
2169
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2170
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
2171
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2172
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
2173
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2174
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
2175
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
2176
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2177
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
2178
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2179
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
2180
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
2181
\def\titleecsize{2074}
2182
 
2183
% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
2184
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
2185
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2186
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2187
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2188
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2189
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2190
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2191
\let\chapbf\chaprm
2192
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2193
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2194
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2195
\def\chapecsize{1440}
2196
 
2197
% Section fonts (12pt).
2198
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
2199
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2200
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
2201
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2202
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2203
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2204
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2205
\let\secbf\secrm
2206
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2207 82 jeremybenn
\font\seci=cmmi12
2208 19 jeremybenn
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
2209
\def\sececsize{1200}
2210
 
2211
% Subsection fonts (10pt).
2212
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
2213
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2214
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2215
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2216
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2217
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2218
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2219
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2220
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2221
\font\sseci=cmmi10
2222
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
2223
\def\ssececsize{1000}
2224
 
2225
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
2226
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
2227
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2228
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2229
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2230
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2231
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2232
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2233
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2234
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2235
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
2236
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2237
\def\reducedecsize{0900}
2238
 
2239
% reduce space between paragraphs
2240
\divide\parskip by 2
2241
 
2242
% reset the current fonts
2243
\textfonts
2244
\rm
2245
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
2246
 
2247
 
2248
% We provide the user-level command
2249
%   @fonttextsize 10
2250
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
2251 82 jeremybenn
%
2252 19 jeremybenn
\def\xword{10}
2253
\def\xiword{11}
2254
%
2255
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2256
  \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2257
  \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2258
  %
2259
  % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2260
  % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2261 82 jeremybenn
  %
2262 19 jeremybenn
 \begingroup \globaldefs=1
2263
  \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2264
  \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2265
  \else
2266
    \errhelp=\EMsimple
2267
    \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
2268
  \fi\fi
2269
 \endgroup
2270
}
2271
 
2272
 
2273
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2274
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
2275
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
2276
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
2277
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
2278
%
2279
\def\resetmathfonts{%
2280
  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
2281
  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
2282
  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
2283
}
2284
 
2285
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2286
% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
2287
% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
2288
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
2289
%
2290
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2291
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
2292
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2293
%
2294
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
2295
%
2296
\def\textfonts{%
2297
  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
2298
  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
2299
  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
2300
  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
2301
  \def\curfontsize{text}%
2302
  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2303
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2304
\def\titlefonts{%
2305
  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
2306
  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
2307
  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
2308
  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
2309
  \def\curfontsize{title}%
2310
  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
2311
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
2312 82 jeremybenn
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
2313 19 jeremybenn
\def\chapfonts{%
2314
  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
2315
  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
2316
  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
2317
  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
2318
  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
2319
  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
2320
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
2321
\def\secfonts{%
2322
  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
2323
  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
2324
  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
2325
  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
2326
  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
2327
  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
2328
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
2329
\def\subsecfonts{%
2330
  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
2331
  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
2332
  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
2333
  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
2334
  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
2335
  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
2336
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
2337
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
2338
\def\reducedfonts{%
2339
  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
2340
  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
2341
  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
2342
  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
2343
  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
2344
  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2345
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2346
\def\smallfonts{%
2347
  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
2348
  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
2349
  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
2350
  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
2351
  \def\curfontsize{small}%
2352
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2353
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2354
\def\smallerfonts{%
2355
  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
2356
  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
2357
  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
2358
  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
2359
  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
2360
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2361
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
2362
 
2363 82 jeremybenn
% Fonts for short table of contents.
2364
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2365
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
2366
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2367
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2368
 
2369
% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2370
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
2371
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
2372
 
2373 19 jeremybenn
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2374
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
2375
 
2376
% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2377
% can fit this many characters:
2378
%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
2379
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2380
%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
2381
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2382
% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
2383
%
2384
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2385
%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
2386
% --karl, 24jan03.
2387
 
2388
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2389
%
2390
\definetextfontsizexi
2391
 
2392
 
2393 82 jeremybenn
\message{markup,}
2394
 
2395
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
2396
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2397
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2398
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
2399
%
2400
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2401
 
2402
% Markup style infrastructure.  \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
2403
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
2404
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
2405
% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
2406
% currently in effect.
2407
\newif\ifmarkupvar
2408
\newif\ifmarkupsamp
2409
\newif\ifmarkupkey
2410
%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
2411
%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
2412
\newif\ifmarkupcode
2413
\newif\ifmarkupkbd
2414
%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
2415
%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
2416
\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
2417
\newif\ifmarkupexample
2418
\newif\ifmarkupverb
2419
\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
2420
 
2421
\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
2422
 
2423
\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
2424
  \csname markup#1true\endcsname
2425
  \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
2426
  \markupstylesetup
2427
}
2428
 
2429
\let\markupstylesetup\empty
2430
 
2431
\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
2432
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
2433
    \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
2434
  \def#1%
2435
}
2436
 
2437
% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
2438
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
2439
  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2440
  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
2441
}
2442
 
2443
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
2444
  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2445
  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
2446
}
2447
 
2448
{
2449
\catcode`\'=\active
2450
\catcode`\`=\active
2451
 
2452
\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
2453
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
2454
 
2455
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
2456
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
2457
 
2458
\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
2459
}
2460
 
2461
\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
2462
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
2463
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
2464
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
2465
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
2466
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
2467
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
2468
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
2469
 
2470
\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
2471
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
2472
 
2473
% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
2474
% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
2475
% from cmtt (char 0x0d).  The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
2476
% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
2477
% evince), the lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the
2478
% regular 0x27.
2479
%
2480
\def\codequoteright{%
2481
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2482
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2483
      '%
2484
    \else \char'15 \fi
2485
  \else \char'15 \fi
2486
}
2487
%
2488
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
2489
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
2490
% the code environments to do likewise.
2491
%
2492
\def\codequoteleft{%
2493
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2494
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2495
      % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
2496
      % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2497
      \relax`%
2498
    \else \char'22 \fi
2499
  \else \char'22 \fi
2500
}
2501
 
2502
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2503
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2504
 
2505 19 jeremybenn
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2506
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
2507
 
2508
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
2509
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
2510
 
2511
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
2512
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
2513
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
2514
                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
2515
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
2516
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
2517
 
2518
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
2519
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
2520
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
2521
 
2522 82 jeremybenn
% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
2523 19 jeremybenn
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
2524
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
2525
 
2526
\let\i=\smartitalic
2527
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
2528 82 jeremybenn
\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
2529 19 jeremybenn
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
2530
\let\emph=\smartitalic
2531
 
2532 82 jeremybenn
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2533
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
2534
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
2535
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
2536
 
2537
% @b, explicit bold.  Also @strong.
2538 19 jeremybenn
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
2539
\let\strong=\b
2540
 
2541
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
2542
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2543
 
2544
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2545
% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2546
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2547
%
2548
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2549
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2550
 
2551
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2552
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2553
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2554
%
2555
\catcode`@=11
2556
  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2557
    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
2558
    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
2559
    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2560
  }
2561
  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2562
    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2563
    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2564
    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2565
  }
2566
\catcode`@=\other
2567
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2568
 
2569 82 jeremybenn
% @t, explicit typewriter.
2570 19 jeremybenn
\def\t#1{%
2571
  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2572
  \null
2573
}
2574 82 jeremybenn
 
2575
% @samp.
2576
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2577
 
2578
% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
2579
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2580
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
2581
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2582
%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2583
%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2584
%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2585
%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2586
%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2587
 
2588
% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
2589
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
2590
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
2591
%
2592
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
2593
  \nohyphenation
2594
  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
2595
  #1}\null}
2596
 
2597
% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
2598 19 jeremybenn
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
2599
 
2600
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
2601
\let\file=\samp
2602
\let\option=\samp
2603
 
2604
% @code is a modification of @t,
2605
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
2606
\def\tclose#1{%
2607
  {%
2608
    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2609
    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2610
    %
2611
    % Switch to typewriter.
2612
    \tt
2613
    %
2614
    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2615
    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2616
    %
2617
    % Turn off hyphenation.
2618
    \nohyphenation
2619
    %
2620
    \rawbackslash
2621
    \plainfrenchspacing
2622
    #1%
2623
  }%
2624
  \null
2625
}
2626
 
2627
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2628
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2629
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2630
 
2631
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2632
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2633
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2634
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
2635
%  -- rms.
2636
{
2637
  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2638
  \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2639 82 jeremybenn
  \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq  % default definitions
2640 19 jeremybenn
  %
2641
  \global\def\code{\begingroup
2642 82 jeremybenn
    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2643
    % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
2644 19 jeremybenn
    \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
2645
    \ifallowcodebreaks
2646
     \let-\codedash
2647
     \let_\codeunder
2648
    \else
2649
     \let-\realdash
2650
     \let_\realunder
2651
    \fi
2652
    \codex
2653
  }
2654
}
2655
 
2656
\def\realdash{-}
2657
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
2658
\def\codeunder{%
2659
  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
2660
  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2661
  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2662
  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2663
  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
2664
               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2665
             \else\normalunderscore \fi
2666
             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2667
            {\_}%
2668
}
2669
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2670
 
2671
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2672
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
2673
% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
2674
% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
2675 82 jeremybenn
%
2676 19 jeremybenn
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
2677
 
2678
\def\keywordtrue{true}
2679
\def\keywordfalse{false}
2680
 
2681
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2682
  \def\txiarg{#1}%
2683
  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2684
    \allowcodebreakstrue
2685
  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2686
    \allowcodebreaksfalse
2687
  \else
2688
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2689
    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
2690
  \fi\fi
2691
}
2692
 
2693
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2694
% then @kbd has no effect.
2695 82 jeremybenn
\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
2696 19 jeremybenn
 
2697
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2698
%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2699
%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2700
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2701
  \def\txiarg{#1}%
2702
  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2703
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2704
  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2705
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2706
  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2707
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2708
  \else
2709
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2710
    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
2711
  \fi\fi\fi
2712
}
2713
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
2714
\def\wordexample{example}
2715
\def\wordcode{code}
2716
 
2717 82 jeremybenn
% Default is `distinct'.
2718 19 jeremybenn
\kbdinputstyle distinct
2719
 
2720
\def\xkey{\key}
2721
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
2722
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2723 82 jeremybenn
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2724
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
2725 19 jeremybenn
 
2726
% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
2727
\let\indicateurl=\code
2728
\let\env=\code
2729
\let\command=\code
2730
 
2731 82 jeremybenn
% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
2732
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
2733
 
2734
% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
2735
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
2736
\def\click{\arrow}
2737
 
2738 19 jeremybenn
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
2739
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
2740
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
2741
% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
2742
% a hypertex \special here.
2743
%
2744
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
2745
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
2746
  \unsepspaces
2747
  \pdfurl{#1}%
2748
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2749
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2750
    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2751
  \else
2752
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2753
    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2754
      \ifpdf
2755
        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2756
      \else
2757
        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2758
      \fi
2759
    \else
2760
      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
2761
    \fi
2762
  \fi
2763
  \endlink
2764
\endgroup}
2765
 
2766
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2767
%
2768
\let\url=\uref
2769
 
2770
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2771
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2772
%
2773
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2774
\ifpdf
2775
  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2776
  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2777
    \unsepspaces
2778
    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2779
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2780
    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2781
    \endlink
2782
  \endgroup}
2783
\else
2784
  \let\email=\uref
2785
\fi
2786
 
2787
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
2788
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2789
%
2790
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2791
 
2792
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2793
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
2794
% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
2795
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2796
 
2797
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2798
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2799
% all-uppercase.
2800 82 jeremybenn
%
2801 19 jeremybenn
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2802
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2803
  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2804
  \def\temp{#2}%
2805
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2806
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2807
  \fi
2808
}
2809
 
2810
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2811
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2812 82 jeremybenn
%
2813 19 jeremybenn
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2814
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2815
  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2816
  \def\temp{#2}%
2817
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2818
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2819
  \fi
2820
}
2821
 
2822 82 jeremybenn
 
2823
\message{glyphs,}
2824
 
2825
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
2826
%
2827
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
2828
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
2829
%
2830
\def\point{$\star$}
2831
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
2832
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
2833
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
2834
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
2835
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
2836
 
2837
% The @error{} command.
2838
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
2839
%
2840
\newbox\errorbox
2841
%
2842
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
2843
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
2844
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
2845
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
2846
%
2847
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
2848
   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
2849
   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
2850
   \vbox{%
2851
      \hrule height\dimen2
2852
      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
2853
         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
2854
         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
2855
      \hrule height\dimen2}
2856
    \hfil}
2857
%
2858
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
2859
 
2860 19 jeremybenn
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
2861
%
2862
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
2863
 
2864
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
2865
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
2866
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
2867
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
2868
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
2869 82 jeremybenn
%
2870 19 jeremybenn
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
2871
% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
2872
% font height.
2873 82 jeremybenn
%
2874 19 jeremybenn
% feymr - regular
2875
% feymo - slanted
2876
% feybr - bold
2877
% feybo - bold slanted
2878 82 jeremybenn
%
2879 19 jeremybenn
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
2880
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
2881
% Hmm.
2882 82 jeremybenn
%
2883 19 jeremybenn
% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
2884
% Hope not.
2885 82 jeremybenn
%
2886
%
2887 19 jeremybenn
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
2888
\def\eurofont{%
2889
  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
2890
  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
2891
  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
2892
  % font installed.
2893 82 jeremybenn
  %
2894 19 jeremybenn
  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
2895
  % that to the current nominal size.
2896 82 jeremybenn
  %
2897 19 jeremybenn
  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
2898
  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
2899 82 jeremybenn
  %
2900 19 jeremybenn
  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
2901
  %
2902 82 jeremybenn
  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
2903 19 jeremybenn
    % bold:
2904
    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
2905 82 jeremybenn
  \else
2906 19 jeremybenn
    % regular:
2907
    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
2908
  \fi
2909
  \thiseurofont
2910
}
2911
 
2912 82 jeremybenn
% Glyphs from the EC fonts.  We don't use \let for the aliases, because
2913
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
2914
% the redefinition.
2915
%
2916
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
2917
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
2918
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
2919
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
2920
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
2921
%
2922 19 jeremybenn
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
2923
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
2924
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
2925
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
2926
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
2927
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
2928
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
2929
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
2930
%
2931 82 jeremybenn
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
2932
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases.  We put the
2933
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
2934
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
2935
%
2936
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
2937
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
2938
% the same EC font.
2939
\def\ogonek#1{{%
2940
  \def\temp{#1}%
2941
  \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
2942
  \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
2943
  \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
2944
  \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
2945
  \else
2946
    \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
2947
    \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
2948
    \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
2949
    \fi
2950
  \fi\fi\fi\fi
2951
  }%
2952
}
2953
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
2954
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
2955
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
2956
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
2957
%
2958
% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
2959 19 jeremybenn
\def\ecfont{%
2960 82 jeremybenn
  % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
2961 19 jeremybenn
  % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
2962
  % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
2963
  % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
2964
  \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
2965
  \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
2966
  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
2967
    % bold:
2968
    \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
2969
  \else
2970
    % regular:
2971
    \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
2972
  \fi
2973
  \thisecfont
2974
}
2975
 
2976
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
2977
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
2978
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
2979
%
2980
\def\registeredsymbol{%
2981
  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
2982
               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
2983
    }$%
2984
}
2985
 
2986
% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
2987
%
2988
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
2989
 
2990
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
2991
%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
2992
% so we'll define it if necessary.
2993 82 jeremybenn
%
2994 19 jeremybenn
\ifx\Orb\undefined
2995
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
2996
\fi
2997
 
2998
% Quotes.
2999
\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
3000
\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
3001
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3002
\chardef\quoteright=`\'
3003
 
3004
 
3005
\message{page headings,}
3006
 
3007
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
3008
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
3009
 
3010
% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3011
\newif\ifseenauthor
3012
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3013
 
3014
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
3015
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
3016
%
3017
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3018
 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3019
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3020
 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3021
 
3022
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3023
        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
3024
 
3025
\envdef\titlepage{%
3026
  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3027
  \begingroup
3028
    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
3029
    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3030
    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3031
    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3032
    \finishedtitlepagetrue
3033
    %
3034
    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3035
    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3036
    \let\oldpage = \page
3037
    \def\page{%
3038
      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3039
         \finishtitlepage
3040
      \fi
3041
      \let\page = \oldpage
3042
      \page
3043
      \null
3044
    }%
3045
}
3046
 
3047
\def\Etitlepage{%
3048
    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3049
        \finishtitlepage
3050
    \fi
3051
    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3052
    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3053
    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3054
    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3055
    \oldpage
3056
  \endgroup
3057
  %
3058
  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
3059
  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
3060
  \HEADINGSon
3061
  %
3062
  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
3063
  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3064
    \shortcontents
3065
    \contents
3066
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3067
    \global\let\contents = \relax
3068
  \fi
3069
  %
3070
  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3071
    \contents
3072
    \global\let\contents = \relax
3073
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3074
  \fi
3075
}
3076
 
3077
\def\finishtitlepage{%
3078
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
3079
  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3080
  \finishedtitlepagetrue
3081
}
3082
 
3083
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3084
 
3085
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
3086
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
3087
 
3088
\parseargdef\title{%
3089
  \checkenv\titlepage
3090 82 jeremybenn
  \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
3091 19 jeremybenn
  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3092
  \finishedtitlepagefalse
3093
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
3094
}
3095
 
3096
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
3097
  \checkenv\titlepage
3098
  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3099
}
3100
 
3101
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
3102
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
3103
%
3104
\parseargdef\author{%
3105
  \def\temp{\quotation}%
3106
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
3107
    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3108
  \else
3109
    \checkenv\titlepage
3110
    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
3111 82 jeremybenn
    {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
3112 19 jeremybenn
  \fi
3113
}
3114
 
3115
 
3116
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
3117
 
3118
\let\thispage=\folio
3119
 
3120
\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
3121
\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
3122
\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
3123
\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
3124
 
3125
% Now make TeX use those variables
3126
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
3127
                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
3128
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
3129
                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
3130
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
3131
 
3132
% Commands to set those variables.
3133
% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
3134
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3135
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3136
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
3137
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3138
 
3139
 
3140
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3141
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3142
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3143
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3144
 
3145
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3146
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3147
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3148
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3149
 
3150
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3151
 
3152
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3153
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3154
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3155
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3156
 
3157
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3158
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3159
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3160
  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3161
  %
3162
  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
3163
  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3164
  \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
3165
  \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
3166
}
3167
 
3168
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3169
 
3170
% @evenheadingmarks top     \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3171
% @evenheadingmarks bottom  \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3172
%
3173
% The same set of arguments for:
3174
%
3175
% @oddheadingmarks
3176
% @evenfootingmarks
3177
% @oddfootingmarks
3178
% @everyheadingmarks
3179
% @everyfootingmarks
3180
 
3181
\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
3182
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
3183
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
3184
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
3185
\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
3186
                          \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
3187
\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
3188
                          \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
3189
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3190
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3191
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
3192
  \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
3193
}
3194
 
3195
\everyheadingmarks bottom
3196
\everyfootingmarks bottom
3197
 
3198
% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3199
% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3200
% @headings off         turns them off.
3201
% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3202
% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3203
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3204
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3205
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3206
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3207
 
3208
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
3209
 
3210
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
3211
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3212
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
3213
\HEADINGSoff
3214
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
3215
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3216
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3217
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3218
% edge of all pages.
3219
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3220
\global\pageno=1
3221
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3222
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3223
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3224
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3225
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3226
}
3227
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3228
 
3229
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3230
% page number on top right.
3231
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3232
\global\pageno=1
3233
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3234
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3235
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3236
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3237
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3238
}
3239
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
3240
 
3241
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
3242
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
3243
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
3244
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3245
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3246
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3247
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3248
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3249
}
3250
 
3251
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
3252
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
3253
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3254
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3255
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3256
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3257
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3258
}
3259
 
3260
% Subroutines used in generating headings
3261
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3262
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3263
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3264
\ifx\today\undefined
3265
\def\today{%
3266
  \number\day\space
3267
  \ifcase\month
3268
  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
3269
  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
3270
  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
3271
  \fi
3272
  \space\number\year}
3273
\fi
3274
 
3275
% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
3276
% It generates no output of its own.
3277
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
3278
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
3279
 
3280
 
3281
\message{tables,}
3282
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
3283
 
3284
% default indentation of table text
3285
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
3286
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
3287
\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
3288
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
3289
\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
3290
 
3291
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
3292
\newdimen\itemmax
3293
 
3294
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
3295
% these defs.
3296
% They also define \itemindex
3297
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
3298
 
3299
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
3300
 
3301
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
3302
 
3303
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
3304
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
3305
 
3306
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
3307
  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
3308
  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
3309
  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
3310
  \itemindex{#1}%
3311
  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
3312
  %
3313
  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
3314
  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
3315
  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
3316
  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
3317
  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
3318
  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
3319
    %
3320
    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
3321
    % but leave it ragged-right.
3322
    \begingroup
3323
      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
3324
      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
3325
      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
3326
      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
3327
    \endgroup
3328
    %
3329
    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
3330
    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
3331
    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
3332
    %
3333
    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
3334
    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
3335
    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
3336
    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
3337
    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
3338
    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
3339 82 jeremybenn
    %
3340 19 jeremybenn
    \penalty 10001
3341
    \endgroup
3342
    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
3343
  \else
3344
    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
3345
    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
3346
    \noindent
3347
    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
3348
    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
3349
    % eventually be printed.
3350
    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
3351
    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
3352
    \unhbox0
3353
    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
3354
    \endgroup
3355
    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
3356
  \fi
3357
}
3358
 
3359
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
3360
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
3361
 
3362
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
3363
\envdef\table{%
3364
  \let\itemindex\gobble
3365
  \tablecheck{table}%
3366
}
3367
\envdef\ftable{%
3368
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
3369
  \tablecheck{ftable}%
3370
}
3371
\envdef\vtable{%
3372
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
3373
  \tablecheck{vtable}%
3374
}
3375
\def\tablecheck#1{%
3376
  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
3377
    \endgroup
3378
    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
3379
      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
3380
    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
3381
  \else
3382
    \let\next\tablex
3383
  \fi
3384
  \next
3385
}
3386
\def\tablex#1{%
3387
  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
3388
  \parsearg\tabley
3389
}
3390
\def\tabley#1{%
3391
  {%
3392
    \makevalueexpandable
3393
    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
3394
    \expandafter
3395
  }\temp \endtablez
3396
}
3397
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
3398
  \aboveenvbreak
3399
  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
3400
  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
3401
  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
3402
  \itemmax=\tableindent
3403
  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
3404
  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
3405
  \exdentamount=\tableindent
3406
  \parindent = 0pt
3407
  \parskip = \smallskipamount
3408
  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3409
  \let\item = \internalBitem
3410
  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
3411
}
3412
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
3413
\let\Eftable\Etable
3414
\let\Evtable\Etable
3415
\let\Eitemize\Etable
3416
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
3417
 
3418
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
3419
 
3420
\newcount \itemno
3421
 
3422
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
3423
 
3424
\def\doitemize#1{%
3425
  \aboveenvbreak
3426
  \itemmax=\itemindent
3427
  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
3428
  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3429
  \exdentamount=\itemindent
3430
  \parindent=0pt
3431
  \parskip=\smallskipamount
3432
  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3433 82 jeremybenn
  %
3434
  % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
3435
  % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
3436
  % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
3437
  % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
3438
  % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
3439 19 jeremybenn
  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
3440 82 jeremybenn
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
3441
  %
3442 19 jeremybenn
  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
3443
  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
3444 82 jeremybenn
  %
3445 19 jeremybenn
  \let\item=\itemizeitem
3446
}
3447
 
3448
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
3449
%
3450
\def\itemizeitem{%
3451
  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
3452
  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
3453
  {%
3454
   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
3455
   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
3456
   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
3457
   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
3458
   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
3459
   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
3460
   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
3461
   % that's the theory.
3462
   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
3463
   \noindent
3464
   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
3465 82 jeremybenn
   %
3466 19 jeremybenn
   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
3467
  \flushcr
3468
}
3469
 
3470
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
3471
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
3472
%
3473
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
3474
 
3475
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
3476
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
3477
% argument is the same as `1'.
3478
%
3479
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
3480
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
3481
  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
3482
  \def\thearg{#1}%
3483
  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
3484
  %
3485
  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
3486
  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
3487
  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
3488
  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
3489
  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
3490
  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
3491
  \ifx\rest\empty
3492
    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
3493
    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
3494
    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
3495
    %   not equal to itself.
3496
    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
3497
    %
3498
    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
3499
    % continuing to look for a <number>.
3500
    %
3501
    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
3502
      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
3503
    \else
3504
      % It's a letter.
3505
      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
3506
        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
3507
      \else
3508
        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
3509
      \fi
3510
    \fi
3511
  \else
3512
    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
3513
    \numericenumerate
3514
  \fi
3515
}
3516
 
3517
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
3518
% given in \thearg.
3519
%
3520
\def\numericenumerate{%
3521
  \itemno = \thearg
3522
  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
3523
}
3524
 
3525
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
3526
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
3527
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3528
  \startenumeration{%
3529
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3530
    \ifnum\itemno=0
3531
      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3532
                  alphabet}%
3533
    \fi
3534
    \char\lccode\itemno
3535
  }%
3536
}
3537
 
3538
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
3539
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
3540
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3541
  \startenumeration{%
3542
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3543
    \ifnum\itemno=0
3544
      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3545
                  alphabet}
3546
    \fi
3547
    \char\uccode\itemno
3548
  }%
3549
}
3550
 
3551
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
3552
% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
3553
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
3554
%
3555
\def\startenumeration#1{%
3556
  \advance\itemno by -1
3557
  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
3558
}
3559
 
3560
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
3561
% to @enumerate.
3562
%
3563
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
3564
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
3565
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3566
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3567
 
3568
 
3569
% @multitable macros
3570
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
3571
%
3572
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
3573
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
3574
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
3575
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
3576
 
3577
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
3578
 
3579
% To make preamble:
3580
%
3581
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
3582
%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
3583
%   @item ...
3584
%
3585
%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
3586
%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
3587
%   columns as desired.
3588
 
3589
 
3590
% Or use a template:
3591
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3592
%   @item ...
3593
%   using the widest term desired in each column.
3594
 
3595
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
3596
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
3597
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
3598
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
3599
 
3600
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
3601
% if they are.
3602
 
3603
% Sample multitable:
3604
 
3605
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3606
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
3607
%   @item
3608
%   first col stuff
3609
%   @tab
3610
%   second col stuff
3611
%   @tab
3612
%   third col
3613
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
3614
%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
3615
%
3616
%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
3617
%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
3618
%   @end multitable
3619
 
3620
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
3621
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
3622
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
3623
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
3624
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
3625
%                                                            to baseline.
3626
%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
3627
%
3628
\newskip\multitableparskip
3629
\newskip\multitableparindent
3630
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
3631
\newskip\multitablelinespace
3632
\multitableparskip=0pt
3633
\multitableparindent=6pt
3634
\multitablecolspace=12pt
3635
\multitablelinespace=0pt
3636
 
3637
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
3638
%
3639
\let\endsetuptable\relax
3640
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
3641
\let\columnfractions\relax
3642
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
3643
\newif\ifsetpercent
3644
 
3645
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
3646
% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
3647
%
3648
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
3649
  \global\advance\colcount by 1
3650
  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
3651
  \setuptable
3652
}
3653
 
3654
\newcount\colcount
3655
\def\setuptable#1{%
3656
  \def\firstarg{#1}%
3657
  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
3658
    \let\go = \relax
3659
  \else
3660
    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
3661
      \global\setpercenttrue
3662
    \else
3663
      \ifsetpercent
3664
         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
3665
      \else
3666
         \global\advance\colcount by 1
3667
         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
3668
                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
3669
         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
3670
      \fi
3671
    \fi
3672
    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
3673
      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
3674
      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
3675
      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
3676
    \else
3677
      \let\go = \setuptable
3678
    \fi%
3679
  \fi
3680
  \go
3681
}
3682
 
3683
% multitable-only commands.
3684
%
3685
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
3686
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
3687 82 jeremybenn
% of an alignment entry.  \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
3688
% undo it ourselves.
3689
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
3690
\def\headitem{%
3691
  \checkenv\multitable
3692
  \crcr
3693
  \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
3694
  \the\everytab % for the first item
3695
}%
3696 19 jeremybenn
%
3697
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
3698
% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
3699 82 jeremybenn
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
3700 19 jeremybenn
%                                       --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
3701
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
3702
 
3703
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
3704
%
3705
\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
3706
%
3707
\envdef\multitable{%
3708
  \vskip\parskip
3709
  \startsavinginserts
3710
  %
3711
  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
3712
  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
3713
  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
3714
  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
3715
  \def\item{\crcr}%
3716
  %
3717
  \tolerance=9500
3718
  \hbadness=9500
3719
  \setmultitablespacing
3720
  \parskip=\multitableparskip
3721
  \parindent=\multitableparindent
3722
  \overfullrule=0pt
3723
  \global\colcount=0
3724
  %
3725
  \everycr = {%
3726
    \noalign{%
3727
      \global\everytab={}%
3728
      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
3729
      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
3730
      \checkinserts
3731
      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
3732
      %\filbreak
3733
        % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
3734
        % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
3735
        % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
3736
    }%
3737
  }%
3738
  %
3739
  \parsearg\domultitable
3740
}
3741
\def\domultitable#1{%
3742
  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
3743
  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
3744
  %
3745
  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
3746
  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
3747
  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
3748
  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
3749
  \halign\bgroup &%
3750
    \global\advance\colcount by 1
3751
    \multistrut
3752
    \vtop{%
3753
      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
3754
      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
3755
      %
3756
      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
3757
      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
3758
      % the first one.
3759
      %
3760
      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
3761
      % to the width of each template entry.
3762
      %
3763
      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
3764
      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
3765
      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
3766
      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
3767
      %
3768
      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
3769
      \rightskip=0pt
3770
      \ifnum\colcount=1
3771
        % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
3772
        \advance\hsize by\leftskip
3773
      \else
3774
        \ifsetpercent \else
3775
          % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
3776
          % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
3777
          \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
3778
        \fi
3779
       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
3780
      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
3781
      \fi
3782
      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
3783
      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
3784
      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
3785
      % For example:
3786
      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
3787
      % @item @code{#}
3788
      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
3789
      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
3790
      % marking characters.
3791
      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
3792
    }\cr
3793
}
3794
\def\Emultitable{%
3795
  \crcr
3796
  \egroup % end the \halign
3797
  \global\setpercentfalse
3798
}
3799
 
3800
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
3801
  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
3802
  %
3803
  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
3804
  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
3805
  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
3806
  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
3807
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
3808
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
3809
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
3810
\fi
3811
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
3812
%% table. If not, do nothing.
3813
%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
3814
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
3815
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
3816
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
3817
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
3818
\fi%
3819
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
3820
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
3821
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
3822
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
3823
\fi}
3824
 
3825
 
3826
\message{conditionals,}
3827
 
3828
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
3829
% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
3830
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
3831
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
3832
% attempt to close an environment group.
3833
%
3834
\def\makecond#1{%
3835
  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
3836
  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
3837
}
3838
\makecond{iftex}
3839
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
3840
\makecond{ifnothtml}
3841
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
3842
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
3843
\makecond{ifnotxml}
3844
 
3845
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
3846
%
3847
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
3848
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
3849
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
3850
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
3851
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
3852
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
3853
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
3854
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
3855
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
3856
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
3857
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
3858
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
3859
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
3860
 
3861
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
3862
%
3863
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
3864
\newcount\doignorecount
3865
 
3866
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
3867
  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
3868
  \obeylines
3869
  \catcode`\@ = \other
3870
  \catcode`\{ = \other
3871
  \catcode`\} = \other
3872
  %
3873
  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
3874
  \spaceisspace
3875
  %
3876
  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
3877
  \doignorecount = 0
3878
  %
3879
  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
3880
  \dodoignore{#1}%
3881
}
3882
 
3883
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
3884
  \obeylines %
3885
  %
3886
  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
3887
    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
3888
    %
3889
    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
3890
    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
3891
      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
3892
    %
3893
    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
3894
    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
3895
    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
3896
    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
3897
    %
3898
    % And now expand that command.
3899
    \doignoretext ^^M%
3900
  }%
3901
}
3902
 
3903
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
3904
  \def\temp{#1}%
3905
  \ifx\temp\empty                       % Nothing found.
3906
    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
3907
  \else                                 % Found a nested condition, ...
3908
    \advance\doignorecount by 1
3909
    \let\next\doignoretextyyy           % ..., look for another.
3910
    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
3911
  \fi
3912
  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
3913
}
3914
 
3915
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
3916
%
3917
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
3918
  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0      % We have just found the outermost @end.
3919
    \let\next\enddoignore
3920
  \else                         % Still inside a nested condition.
3921
    \advance\doignorecount by -1
3922
    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
3923
  \fi
3924
  \next
3925
}
3926
 
3927
% Finish off ignored text.
3928
{ \obeylines%
3929
  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
3930
  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
3931
  % would result in a blank line in the output.
3932
  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
3933
}
3934
 
3935
 
3936
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
3937
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
3938
%
3939
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
3940
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
3941
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
3942
% didn't need it.
3943
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
3944
%
3945
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
3946
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
3947
  {%
3948
    \makevalueexpandable
3949
    \def\temp{#2}%
3950
    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
3951
    \ifx\temp\empty
3952
      \next{}%
3953
    \else
3954
      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
3955
    \fi
3956
  }%
3957
}
3958
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
3959
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
3960
 
3961
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
3962
%
3963
\parseargdef\clear{%
3964
  {%
3965
    \makevalueexpandable
3966
    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
3967
  }%
3968
}
3969
 
3970
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
3971
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
3972
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
3973
{
3974
  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
3975
  %
3976
  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
3977
    \let\value = \expandablevalue
3978
    % We don't want these characters active, ...
3979
    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
3980
    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
3981
    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
3982
    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
3983
    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
3984
  }
3985
}
3986
 
3987
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
3988
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
3989
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
3990
% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
3991
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
3992
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
3993
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
3994
%
3995
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
3996
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
3997
    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
3998
    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
3999
  \else
4000
    \csname SET#1\endcsname
4001
  \fi
4002
}
4003
 
4004
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4005
% with @set.
4006
%
4007
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
4008
%
4009
\makecond{ifset}
4010
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
4011
\def\doifset#1#2{%
4012
  {%
4013
    \makevalueexpandable
4014
    \let\next=\empty
4015
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
4016
      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4017
    \fi
4018
    \expandafter
4019
  }\next
4020
}
4021
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
4022
 
4023
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
4024
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4025
%
4026
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4027
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4028
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4029
%
4030
\makecond{ifclear}
4031
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
4032
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
4033
 
4034
% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
4035
% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
4036
\let\dircategory=\comment
4037
 
4038
% @defininfoenclose.
4039
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
4040
 
4041
 
4042
\message{indexing,}
4043
% Index generation facilities
4044
 
4045
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4046
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4047
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
4048
 
4049
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
4050
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
4051
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
4052
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4053
% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
4054
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
4055
% for the sake of vms.
4056
%
4057
\def\newindex#1{%
4058
  \iflinks
4059
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4060
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
4061
  \fi
4062
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
4063
    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4064
}
4065
 
4066
% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
4067
%
4068
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4069
 
4070
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4071
%
4072
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4073
%
4074
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
4075
  \iflinks
4076
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4077
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
4078
  \fi
4079
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
4080
    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4081
}
4082
 
4083
 
4084
% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
4085
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4086
%
4087
% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4088
% inside @code.
4089
%
4090
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4091
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4092
 
4093
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4094
% #3 the target index (bar).
4095
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4096
  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
4097
  % closing the target index.
4098 82 jeremybenn
  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
4099 19 jeremybenn
    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
4100
    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
4101
    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
4102 82 jeremybenn
    \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
4103 19 jeremybenn
  \fi
4104
  % redefine \fooindfile:
4105
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
4106
  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
4107
  % redefine \fooindex:
4108
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4109
}
4110
 
4111
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
4112
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4113
%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
4114
 
4115
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
4116
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
4117
 
4118
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
4119
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
4120
 
4121
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
4122
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4123
 
4124
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4125
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
4126
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
4127
 
4128
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
4129
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
4130
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
4131
%
4132
\def\indexdummies{%
4133
  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
4134
  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
4135
  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
4136
  %
4137
  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
4138
  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
4139
  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
4140
  \let\{ = \mylbrace
4141
  \let\} = \myrbrace
4142
  %
4143
  % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
4144
  % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
4145
  % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
4146
  % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
4147
  % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
4148
  % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
4149
  % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
4150
  % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
4151
  % is still getting written without apparent harm.
4152 82 jeremybenn
  %
4153 19 jeremybenn
  % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
4154
  % help-texinfo, 22may06):
4155
  % @macro funindex {WORD}
4156
  % @findex xyz
4157
  % @end macro
4158
  % ...
4159
  % @funindex commtest
4160 82 jeremybenn
  %
4161 19 jeremybenn
  % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
4162 82 jeremybenn
  %
4163 19 jeremybenn
  % Sample whatsit resulting:
4164
  % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
4165 82 jeremybenn
  %
4166 19 jeremybenn
  % So:
4167
  \let\endinput = \empty
4168
  %
4169
  % Do the redefinitions.
4170
  \commondummies
4171
}
4172
 
4173
% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
4174
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
4175
% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
4176
% this will be simpler.
4177
%
4178
\def\atdummies{%
4179
  \def\@{@@}%
4180
  \def\ {@ }%
4181
  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
4182
  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
4183
  %
4184
  % Do the redefinitions.
4185
  \commondummies
4186
  \otherbackslash
4187
}
4188
 
4189
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
4190
%
4191
\def\commondummies{%
4192
  %
4193
  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4194
  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control% words,
4195
  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4196
  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4197
  % from whatever follows.
4198
  %
4199
  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4200
  % space.
4201
  %
4202
  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4203
  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4204
  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4205
  %
4206
  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
4207
  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
4208
  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
4209
  %
4210
  \commondummiesnofonts
4211
  %
4212
  \definedummyletter\_%
4213
  %
4214
  % Non-English letters.
4215
  \definedummyword\AA
4216
  \definedummyword\AE
4217 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\DH
4218 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\L
4219 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\O
4220 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\OE
4221 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\TH
4222 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\aa
4223
  \definedummyword\ae
4224 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\dh
4225
  \definedummyword\exclamdown
4226 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\l
4227 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\o
4228 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\oe
4229
  \definedummyword\ordf
4230
  \definedummyword\ordm
4231 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\questiondown
4232
  \definedummyword\ss
4233
  \definedummyword\th
4234 19 jeremybenn
  %
4235
  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
4236
  \definedummyword\bf
4237
  \definedummyword\gtr
4238
  \definedummyword\hat
4239
  \definedummyword\less
4240
  \definedummyword\sf
4241
  \definedummyword\sl
4242
  \definedummyword\tclose
4243
  \definedummyword\tt
4244
  %
4245
  \definedummyword\LaTeX
4246
  \definedummyword\TeX
4247
  %
4248
  % Assorted special characters.
4249
  \definedummyword\bullet
4250
  \definedummyword\comma
4251
  \definedummyword\copyright
4252
  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
4253
  \definedummyword\dots
4254
  \definedummyword\enddots
4255
  \definedummyword\equiv
4256
  \definedummyword\error
4257
  \definedummyword\euro
4258
  \definedummyword\guillemetleft
4259
  \definedummyword\guillemetright
4260
  \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
4261
  \definedummyword\guilsinglright
4262
  \definedummyword\expansion
4263
  \definedummyword\minus
4264 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\ogonek
4265 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\pounds
4266
  \definedummyword\point
4267
  \definedummyword\print
4268
  \definedummyword\quotedblbase
4269
  \definedummyword\quotedblleft
4270
  \definedummyword\quotedblright
4271
  \definedummyword\quoteleft
4272
  \definedummyword\quoteright
4273
  \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
4274
  \definedummyword\result
4275
  \definedummyword\textdegree
4276
  %
4277
  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4278
  \macrolist
4279
  %
4280
  \normalturnoffactive
4281
  %
4282
  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
4283
  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
4284
  \makevalueexpandable
4285
}
4286
 
4287
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
4288
%
4289
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
4290
  % Control letters and accents.
4291
  \definedummyletter\!%
4292
  \definedummyaccent\"%
4293
  \definedummyaccent\'%
4294
  \definedummyletter\*%
4295
  \definedummyaccent\,%
4296
  \definedummyletter\.%
4297
  \definedummyletter\/%
4298
  \definedummyletter\:%
4299
  \definedummyaccent\=%
4300
  \definedummyletter\?%
4301
  \definedummyaccent\^%
4302
  \definedummyaccent\`%
4303
  \definedummyaccent\~%
4304
  \definedummyword\u
4305
  \definedummyword\v
4306
  \definedummyword\H
4307
  \definedummyword\dotaccent
4308 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\ogonek
4309 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\ringaccent
4310
  \definedummyword\tieaccent
4311
  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
4312
  \definedummyword\udotaccent
4313
  \definedummyword\dotless
4314
  %
4315
  % Texinfo font commands.
4316
  \definedummyword\b
4317
  \definedummyword\i
4318
  \definedummyword\r
4319
  \definedummyword\sc
4320
  \definedummyword\t
4321
  %
4322
  % Commands that take arguments.
4323
  \definedummyword\acronym
4324
  \definedummyword\cite
4325
  \definedummyword\code
4326
  \definedummyword\command
4327
  \definedummyword\dfn
4328 82 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\email
4329 19 jeremybenn
  \definedummyword\emph
4330
  \definedummyword\env
4331
  \definedummyword\file
4332
  \definedummyword\kbd
4333
  \definedummyword\key
4334
  \definedummyword\math
4335
  \definedummyword\option
4336
  \definedummyword\pxref
4337
  \definedummyword\ref
4338
  \definedummyword\samp
4339
  \definedummyword\strong
4340
  \definedummyword\tie
4341
  \definedummyword\uref
4342
  \definedummyword\url
4343
  \definedummyword\var
4344
  \definedummyword\verb
4345
  \definedummyword\w
4346
  \definedummyword\xref
4347
}
4348
 
4349
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
4350
% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
4351
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
4352
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
4353
%
4354
\def\indexnofonts{%
4355
  % Accent commands should become @asis.
4356
  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
4357
  % We can just ignore other control letters.
4358
  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
4359
  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
4360
  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
4361
  %
4362
  \commondummiesnofonts
4363
  %
4364
  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
4365
  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
4366
  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
4367
  %\let\tt=\asis
4368
  %
4369
  \def\ { }%
4370
  \def\@{@}%
4371
  % how to handle braces?
4372
  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
4373
  %
4374
  % Non-English letters.
4375
  \def\AA{AA}%
4376
  \def\AE{AE}%
4377 82 jeremybenn
  \def\DH{DZZ}%
4378 19 jeremybenn
  \def\L{L}%
4379
  \def\OE{OE}%
4380
  \def\O{O}%
4381 82 jeremybenn
  \def\TH{ZZZ}%
4382 19 jeremybenn
  \def\aa{aa}%
4383
  \def\ae{ae}%
4384 82 jeremybenn
  \def\dh{dzz}%
4385
  \def\exclamdown{!}%
4386 19 jeremybenn
  \def\l{l}%
4387
  \def\oe{oe}%
4388 82 jeremybenn
  \def\ordf{a}%
4389
  \def\ordm{o}%
4390 19 jeremybenn
  \def\o{o}%
4391 82 jeremybenn
  \def\questiondown{?}%
4392 19 jeremybenn
  \def\ss{ss}%
4393 82 jeremybenn
  \def\th{zzz}%
4394 19 jeremybenn
  %
4395
  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
4396
  \def\TeX{TeX}%
4397
  %
4398
  % Assorted special characters.
4399
  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
4400
  \def\bullet{bullet}%
4401
  \def\comma{,}%
4402
  \def\copyright{copyright}%
4403
  \def\dots{...}%
4404
  \def\enddots{...}%
4405
  \def\equiv{==}%
4406
  \def\error{error}%
4407
  \def\euro{euro}%
4408 82 jeremybenn
  \def\expansion{==>}%
4409 19 jeremybenn
  \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
4410
  \def\guillemetright{>>}%
4411
  \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
4412
  \def\guilsinglright{>}%
4413
  \def\minus{-}%
4414 82 jeremybenn
  \def\point{.}%
4415 19 jeremybenn
  \def\pounds{pounds}%
4416
  \def\print{-|}%
4417
  \def\quotedblbase{"}%
4418
  \def\quotedblleft{"}%
4419
  \def\quotedblright{"}%
4420
  \def\quoteleft{`}%
4421
  \def\quoteright{'}%
4422
  \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
4423 82 jeremybenn
  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
4424 19 jeremybenn
  \def\result{=>}%
4425 82 jeremybenn
  \def\textdegree{o}%
4426 19 jeremybenn
  %
4427
  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
4428
  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
4429
  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
4430
  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
4431
  % that starts with \.
4432 82 jeremybenn
  %
4433 19 jeremybenn
  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
4434
  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
4435
  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
4436 82 jeremybenn
  %
4437 19 jeremybenn
  \macrolist
4438
}
4439
 
4440
\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
4441
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
4442
 
4443
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
4444
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
4445
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
4446
 
4447
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
4448
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
4449
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
4450
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
4451
%
4452
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
4453
  \iflinks
4454
  {%
4455
    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
4456
    \toks0 = {#2}%
4457
    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
4458
    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
4459
    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
4460
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
4461
    \fi
4462
    %
4463
    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
4464
    %
4465
    \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
4466
  }%
4467
  \fi
4468
}
4469
 
4470
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
4471
%
4472
\def\dosubindwrite{%
4473
  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
4474
  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
4475
    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
4476
  \fi
4477
  %
4478
  % Remember, we are within a group.
4479
  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
4480
  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
4481
      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
4482
  %
4483
  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
4484
  % get the string to sort by.
4485
  {\indexnofonts
4486
   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
4487
   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
4488
  }%
4489
  %
4490
  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
4491
  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
4492
  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
4493
  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
4494
  % sorted result.
4495
  \edef\temp{%
4496
    \write\writeto{%
4497
      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
4498
  }%
4499
  \temp
4500
}
4501
 
4502
% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
4503
%
4504
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
4505
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
4506
% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
4507
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
4508
% sequences like this:
4509
% @end defun
4510
% @tindex whatever
4511
% @defun ...
4512
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
4513
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
4514
% the previous defun.
4515
%
4516
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
4517
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
4518
%
4519
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
4520
%
4521
% But wait, there is a catch there:
4522
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
4523
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
4524
% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
4525
% representation of the skip.
4526
%
4527
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
4528
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
4529
%
4530
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
4531
%
4532
\newskip\whatsitskip
4533
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
4534
%
4535
% ..., ready, GO:
4536
%
4537
\def\safewhatsit#1{%
4538
\ifhmode
4539
  #1%
4540
\else
4541
  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
4542
  \whatsitskip = \lastskip
4543
  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
4544
  \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
4545
  %
4546
  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
4547
  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
4548
  % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
4549
  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
4550
  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
4551
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4552
  \else
4553
    \vskip-\whatsitskip
4554
  \fi
4555
  %
4556
  #1%
4557
  %
4558
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4559
    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
4560
    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
4561
    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
4562
    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
4563
    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
4564 82 jeremybenn
    %
4565 19 jeremybenn
    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
4566
    %   @vindex index-whatever
4567
    %   Description.
4568
    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
4569
    % and the "Description." paragraph.
4570
    \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
4571
  \else
4572
    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
4573
    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
4574
    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
4575
    \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
4576
  \fi
4577
\fi
4578
}
4579
 
4580
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
4581
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
4582
% or
4583
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
4584
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
4585
% containing these kinds of lines:
4586
%  \initial {c}
4587
%     before the first topic whose initial is c
4588
%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
4589
%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
4590
%  \primary {topic}
4591
%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
4592
%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
4593
%     for each subtopic.
4594
 
4595
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
4596
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
4597
 
4598
\def\findex {\fnindex}
4599
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
4600
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
4601
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
4602
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
4603
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
4604
 
4605
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
4606
{\obeylines %
4607
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
4608
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
4609
 
4610
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
4611
 
4612
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
4613
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
4614
%
4615
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
4616
  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
4617
  %
4618
  \smallfonts \rm
4619
  \tolerance = 9500
4620
  \plainfrenchspacing
4621
  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
4622
  %
4623
  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
4624
  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
4625
  % \initial {@}
4626
  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
4627
  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
4628
  \catcode`\@ = 11
4629
  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
4630
  \ifeof 1
4631
    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
4632
    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
4633
    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
4634
    % there is some text.
4635
    \putwordIndexNonexistent
4636
  \else
4637
    %
4638
    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
4639
    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
4640
    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
4641
    \read 1 to \temp
4642
    \ifeof 1
4643
      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
4644
    \else
4645
      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
4646
      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
4647
      % to make right now.
4648
      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
4649
      \catcode`\\ = 0
4650
      \escapechar = `\\
4651
      \begindoublecolumns
4652
      \input \jobname.#1s
4653
      \enddoublecolumns
4654
    \fi
4655
  \fi
4656
  \closein 1
4657
\endgroup}
4658
 
4659
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
4660
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
4661
 
4662
\def\initial#1{{%
4663
  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
4664
  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
4665
  %
4666
  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
4667
  \removelastskip
4668
  %
4669
  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
4670
  \nobreak
4671
  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
4672
  \penalty 0
4673
  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
4674
  %
4675
  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
4676
  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
4677
  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
4678
  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
4679
  %
4680
  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
4681
  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
4682
  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
4683
  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
4684
  \nobreak
4685
  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
4686
}}
4687
 
4688
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
4689
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
4690
% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
4691
%
4692
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
4693
%       \def\entry#1#2{...
4694 82 jeremybenn
% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
4695 19 jeremybenn
% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
4696
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
4697
%
4698
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
4699
%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
4700
\def\entry{%
4701
  \begingroup
4702
    %
4703
    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
4704
    % affect previous text.
4705
    \par
4706
    %
4707
    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
4708
    \parfillskip = 0in
4709
    %
4710
    % No extra space above this paragraph.
4711
    \parskip = 0in
4712
    %
4713
    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
4714
    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
4715
    %
4716
    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
4717
    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
4718
    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
4719
    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
4720
    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
4721
    %
4722
    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
4723
    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
4724
    \hangindent = 2em
4725
    %
4726
    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
4727
    % with blank space.
4728
    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
4729
    %
4730
    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
4731
    % columns.
4732
    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
4733
    %
4734
    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
4735
    \afterassignment\doentry
4736
    \let\temp =
4737
}
4738
\def\doentry{%
4739
    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
4740
      \noindent
4741
      \aftergroup\finishentry
4742
      % And now comes the text of the entry.
4743
}
4744
\def\finishentry#1{%
4745
    % #1 is the page number.
4746
    %
4747
    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
4748
    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
4749
    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
4750
    \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
4751
    \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
4752
      \ %
4753
    \else
4754
      %
4755
      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
4756
      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
4757
      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
4758
      \hfil\penalty50
4759
      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
4760
      %
4761
      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
4762
      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
4763
      % \hbox ensues.
4764
      \ifpdf
4765
        \pdfgettoks#1.%
4766
        \ \the\toksA
4767
      \else
4768
        \ #1%
4769
      \fi
4770
    \fi
4771
    \par
4772
  \endgroup
4773
}
4774
 
4775
% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
4776
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
4777
  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
4778
 
4779
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
4780
 
4781
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
4782
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
4783
  \parfillskip=0in
4784
  \parskip=0in
4785
  \hangindent=1in
4786
  \hangafter=1
4787
  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
4788
  \ifpdf
4789
    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
4790
  \else
4791
    #2
4792
  \fi
4793
  \par
4794
}}
4795
 
4796
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
4797
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
4798
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
4799
\catcode`\@=11
4800
 
4801
\newbox\partialpage
4802
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
4803
 
4804
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
4805
  % Grab any single-column material above us.
4806
  \output = {%
4807
    %
4808
    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
4809
    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
4810
    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
4811
    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
4812
    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
4813
    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
4814
    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
4815
    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
4816
      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
4817
    \fi
4818
    %
4819
    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
4820
      % Unvbox the main output page.
4821
      \unvbox\PAGE
4822
      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
4823
    }%
4824
  }%
4825
  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
4826
  %
4827
  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
4828
  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
4829
  %
4830
  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
4831
  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
4832
  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
4833
  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
4834
  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
4835
  %
4836
  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
4837
  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
4838
  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
4839
  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
4840
  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
4841
  %
4842
  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
4843
  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
4844
  % been clobbered.
4845
  %
4846
  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
4847
    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
4848
    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
4849
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
4850
  %
4851
  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
4852
  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
4853
  \vsize = 2\vsize
4854
}
4855
 
4856
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
4857
% the last.
4858
%
4859
\def\doublecolumnout{%
4860
  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
4861
  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
4862
  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
4863
  % previous page.
4864
  \dimen@ = \vsize
4865
  \divide\dimen@ by 2
4866
  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
4867
  %
4868
  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
4869
  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
4870
  \onepageout\pagesofar
4871
  \unvbox255
4872
  \penalty\outputpenalty
4873
}
4874
%
4875
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
4876
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
4877
\def\pagesofar{%
4878
  \unvbox\partialpage
4879
  %
4880
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
4881
  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
4882
  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
4883
}
4884
%
4885
% All done with double columns.
4886
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
4887
  % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
4888
  % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
4889
  % following situation:
4890
  %
4891
  % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
4892
  % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
4893
  % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
4894
  % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
4895
  % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
4896
  % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
4897
  % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
4898
  % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
4899
  % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
4900
  % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
4901
  % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
4902
  % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
4903
  % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
4904
  % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
4905
  % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
4906
  % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
4907
  % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
4908
  % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
4909
  % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
4910
  %
4911
  % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
4912
  % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
4913
  \penalty0
4914
  %
4915
  \output = {%
4916
    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
4917
    % current page, no automatic page break.
4918
    \balancecolumns
4919
    %
4920
    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
4921
    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
4922
    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
4923
    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
4924
    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
4925
    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
4926
    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
4927
    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
4928
  }%
4929
  \eject
4930
  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
4931
  %
4932
  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
4933
  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
4934
  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
4935
  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
4936
  \pagegoal = \vsize
4937
}
4938
%
4939
% Called at the end of the double column material.
4940
\def\balancecolumns{%
4941
  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
4942
  \dimen@ = \ht0
4943
  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
4944
  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
4945
  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
4946
  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
4947
  \splittopskip = \topskip
4948
  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
4949
  {%
4950
    \vbadness = 10000
4951
    \loop
4952
      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
4953
      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
4954
    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
4955
      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
4956
    \repeat
4957
  }%
4958
  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
4959
  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
4960
  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
4961
  %
4962
  \pagesofar
4963
}
4964
\catcode`\@ = \other
4965
 
4966
 
4967
\message{sectioning,}
4968
% Chapters, sections, etc.
4969
 
4970
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
4971
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
4972
% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
4973
% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
4974
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
4975
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
4976
\newcount\chapno
4977
\newcount\secno        \secno=0
4978
\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
4979
\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
4980
 
4981
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
4982
\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
4983
%
4984
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
4985
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
4986
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
4987
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
4988
%
4989
\def\appendixletter{%
4990
  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
4991
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
4992
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
4993
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
4994
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
4995
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
4996
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
4997
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
4998
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
4999
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
5000
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
5001
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
5002
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
5003
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
5004
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
5005
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
5006
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
5007
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
5008
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
5009
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
5010
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
5011
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
5012
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
5013
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
5014
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
5015
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
5016
  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5017
  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
5018
  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5019
  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5020
  \else\char\the\appendixno
5021
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5022
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5023
 
5024
% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5025
% and name of the chapter.  Page headings and footings can use
5026
% these.  @section does likewise.
5027
\def\thischapter{}
5028
\def\thischapternum{}
5029
\def\thischaptername{}
5030
\def\thissection{}
5031
\def\thissectionnum{}
5032
\def\thissectionname{}
5033
 
5034
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5035
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5036
 
5037
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
5038
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
5039
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
5040
 
5041
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
5042
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
5043
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
5044
 
5045
% we only have subsub.
5046
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
5047
%
5048
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
5049
% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
5050
\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
5051
%
5052
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
5053
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
5054
\def\chapheadtype{N}
5055
 
5056
% Choose a heading macro
5057
% #1 is heading type
5058
% #2 is heading level
5059
% #3 is text for heading
5060
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
5061
  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
5062
  \absseclevel=#2
5063
  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
5064
  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
5065
  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
5066
    \absseclevel = 0
5067
  \else
5068
    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
5069
      \absseclevel = 3
5070
    \fi
5071
  \fi
5072
  % The heading type:
5073
  \def\headtype{#1}%
5074
  \if \headtype U%
5075
    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
5076
      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
5077
    \fi
5078
  \else
5079
    % Check for appendix sections:
5080
    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
5081
      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
5082
    \else
5083
      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
5084
        \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
5085
      \fi\fi
5086
    \fi
5087
    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
5088
    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
5089
      \def\headtype{U}%
5090
    \else
5091
      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
5092
    \fi
5093
  \fi
5094
  % Now print the heading:
5095
  \if \headtype U%
5096
    \ifcase\absseclevel
5097
        \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
5098
    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
5099
    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5100
    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5101
    \fi
5102
  \else
5103
    \if \headtype A%
5104
      \ifcase\absseclevel
5105
          \appendixzzz{#3}%
5106
      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
5107
      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
5108
      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5109
      \fi
5110
    \else
5111
      \ifcase\absseclevel
5112
          \chapterzzz{#3}%
5113
      \or \seczzz{#3}%
5114
      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5115
      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5116
      \fi
5117
    \fi
5118
  \fi
5119
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5120
}
5121
 
5122
% an interface:
5123
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
5124
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
5125
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
5126
 
5127
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
5128
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
5129
%
5130
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
5131
% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
5132
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5133
%
5134
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
5135
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
5136
  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
5137
  % as an @include file.
5138
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5139
    \global\advance\chapno by 1
5140
  %
5141
  % Used for \float.
5142
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
5143
  \resetallfloatnos
5144
  %
5145 82 jeremybenn
  % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
5146
  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
5147
  \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
5148 19 jeremybenn
  %
5149
  % Write the actual heading.
5150
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
5151
  %
5152
  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
5153
  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
5154
  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5155
  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5156
}
5157
 
5158 82 jeremybenn
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
5159
%
5160 19 jeremybenn
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
5161
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5162
    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
5163
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
5164
  \resetallfloatnos
5165
  %
5166 82 jeremybenn
  % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
5167
  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
5168
  \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
5169 19 jeremybenn
  %
5170
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
5171
  %
5172
  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
5173
  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
5174
  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
5175
}
5176
 
5177
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
5178
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
5179
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5180
    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
5181
  %
5182
  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
5183
  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5184
  \resetallfloatnos
5185
  %
5186
  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
5187
  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
5188
  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
5189
  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
5190
  % to be executed, not expanded).
5191
  %
5192
  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
5193
  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
5194
  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
5195
  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
5196
  % the toc entries.)
5197
  \toks0 = {#1}%
5198
  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
5199
  %
5200
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
5201
  %
5202
  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
5203
  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
5204
  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
5205
}
5206
 
5207
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
5208
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
5209
  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
5210
  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
5211
  % Thus we are safer this way:         --kasal, 24feb04
5212
  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
5213
  \unnmhead0{#1}%
5214
  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5215
}
5216
 
5217
% @top is like @unnumbered.
5218
\let\top\unnumbered
5219
 
5220
% Sections.
5221
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
5222
\def\seczzz#1{%
5223
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
5224
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
5225
}
5226
 
5227
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
5228
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
5229
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
5230
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
5231
}
5232
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
5233
 
5234
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
5235
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
5236
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
5237
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
5238
}
5239
 
5240
% Subsections.
5241
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
5242
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
5243
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5244
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5245
}
5246
 
5247
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
5248
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
5249
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5250
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
5251
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5252
}
5253
 
5254
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
5255
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
5256
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5257
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
5258
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5259
}
5260
 
5261
% Subsubsections.
5262
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
5263
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5264
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5265
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
5266
                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5267
}
5268
 
5269
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
5270
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
5271
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5272
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
5273
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5274
}
5275
 
5276
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
5277
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5278
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5279
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
5280
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5281
}
5282
 
5283
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
5284
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
5285
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
5286
\let\section = \numberedsec
5287
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5288
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5289
 
5290
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
5291
 
5292
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
5293
%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
5294
%          overlong headings to fold.
5295
%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
5296
%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
5297
%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
5298
%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
5299
 
5300
\def\majorheading{%
5301
  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
5302
  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
5303
}
5304
 
5305
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
5306
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
5307
  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5308 82 jeremybenn
                    \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
5309
                    \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
5310 19 jeremybenn
  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
5311
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5312
}
5313
 
5314
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
5315
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5316
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5317
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5318
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5319
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5320
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5321
 
5322
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
5323
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
5324
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
5325
 
5326
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
5327
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
5328
 
5329
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
5330
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
5331
 
5332
\newskip\chapheadingskip
5333
 
5334
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
5335
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
5336
% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
5337
% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
5338
% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
5339
\def\chapoddpage{%
5340
  \chappager
5341
  \ifodd\pageno \else
5342
    \begingroup
5343
      \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
5344
      \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
5345
      \hbox to 0pt{}%
5346
      \chappager
5347
    \endgroup
5348
  \fi
5349
}
5350
 
5351
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
5352
 
5353
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
5354
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5355
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
5356
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
5357
 
5358
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
5359
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5360
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
5361
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
5362
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
5363
 
5364
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
5365
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
5366
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
5367
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
5368
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
5369
 
5370
\CHAPPAGon
5371
 
5372
% Chapter opening.
5373
%
5374
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
5375
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
5376
%
5377
% To test against our argument.
5378
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
5379
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
5380
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
5381
%
5382
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
5383
  % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5384
  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5385
  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5386
  \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5387
                        \gdef\thissection{}}%
5388
  %
5389
  \def\temptype{#2}%
5390
  \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5391
    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5392
                          \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
5393
  \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5394
    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5395
                          \gdef\thischapter{}}%
5396
  \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5397
    \toks0={#1}%
5398
    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5399
      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5400
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
5401 82 jeremybenn
      % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
5402
      % commands in some of the translations.
5403
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
5404
                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
5405 19 jeremybenn
                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5406
    }%
5407
  \else
5408
    \toks0={#1}%
5409
    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5410
      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5411
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
5412 82 jeremybenn
      % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
5413
      % commands in some of the translations.
5414
      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
5415
                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
5416 19 jeremybenn
                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5417
    }%
5418
  \fi\fi\fi
5419
  %
5420
  % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5421
  % the preceding space.
5422
  \safewhatsit\domark
5423
  %
5424
  % Insert the chapter heading break.
5425
  \pchapsepmacro
5426
  %
5427
  % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
5428
  % between here and the heading.
5429
  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5430
  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5431
  \domark
5432
  %
5433
  {%
5434 82 jeremybenn
    \chapfonts \rmisbold
5435 19 jeremybenn
    %
5436
    % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
5437
    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
5438
    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
5439
    \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5440
    %
5441
    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
5442
    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
5443
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5444
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5445
      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
5446
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5447
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
5448
      \def\toctype{omit}%
5449
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5450
      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
5451
      \def\toctype{app}%
5452
    \else
5453
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
5454
      \def\toctype{numchap}%
5455
    \fi\fi\fi
5456
    %
5457
    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
5458
    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
5459
    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
5460
    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
5461
    %
5462
    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
5463
    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
5464
    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
5465
    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
5466
    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
5467
    \donoderef{#2}%
5468
    %
5469
    % Typeset the actual heading.
5470
    \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
5471 82 jeremybenn
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5472 19 jeremybenn
          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
5473
          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
5474
  }%
5475
  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
5476
  \nobreak
5477
}
5478
 
5479
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
5480
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5481
\def\centerparameters{%
5482
  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
5483
  \leftskip = \rightskip
5484
  \parfillskip = 0pt
5485
}
5486
 
5487
 
5488
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
5489
% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
5490
%
5491
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
5492
%
5493
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
5494
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5495 82 jeremybenn
                       \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
5496
                       \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
5497 19 jeremybenn
}
5498
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
5499
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
5500
\par\penalty 5000 %
5501
}
5502
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
5503
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5504
                       \parindent=0pt
5505 82 jeremybenn
                       \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
5506 19 jeremybenn
}
5507
\def\CHAPFopen{%
5508
  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
5509
  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
5510
 
5511
 
5512
% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
5513
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
5514
%
5515
\newskip\secheadingskip
5516
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
5517
 
5518
% Subsection titles.
5519
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
5520
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
5521
 
5522
% Subsubsection titles.
5523
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
5524
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
5525
 
5526
 
5527
% Print any size, any type, section title.
5528
%
5529
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
5530
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
5531
% section number.
5532
%
5533
\def\seckeyword{sec}
5534
%
5535
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
5536
  {%
5537
    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
5538 82 jeremybenn
    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
5539 19 jeremybenn
    %
5540
    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
5541
    \def\temptype{#3}%
5542
    %
5543
    % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5544
    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5545
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5546
      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5547
        \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5548
                              \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
5549
      \fi
5550
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5551
      % Don't redefine \thissection.
5552
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5553
      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5554
        \toks0={#1}%
5555
        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5556
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5557
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5558 82 jeremybenn
          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5559
          % commands in some of the translations.
5560
          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5561
                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5562 19 jeremybenn
                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5563
        }%
5564
      \fi
5565
    \else
5566
      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5567
        \toks0={#1}%
5568
        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5569
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5570
          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5571 82 jeremybenn
          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5572
          % commands in some of the translations.
5573
          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5574
                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5575 19 jeremybenn
                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5576
        }%
5577
      \fi
5578
    \fi\fi\fi
5579
    %
5580 82 jeremybenn
    % Go into vertical mode.  Usually we'll already be there, but we
5581
    % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
5582
    % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
5583
    \par
5584
    %
5585 19 jeremybenn
    % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5586
    % the preceding space.
5587
    \safewhatsit\domark
5588
    %
5589
    % Insert space above the heading.
5590
    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
5591
    %
5592
    % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
5593
    % between here and the heading.
5594
    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5595
    \domark
5596
    %
5597
    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
5598
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5599
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5600
      \def\toctype{unn}%
5601
      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5602
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5603
      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
5604
      % and don't redefine \lastsection.
5605
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5606
      \def\toctype{omit}%
5607
      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
5608
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5609
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5610
      \def\toctype{app}%
5611
      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5612
    \else
5613
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5614
      \def\toctype{num}%
5615
      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5616
    \fi\fi\fi
5617
    %
5618
    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
5619
    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
5620
    %
5621
    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
5622
    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
5623
    \donoderef{#3}%
5624
    %
5625
    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
5626
    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
5627
    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
5628
    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
5629
    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
5630
    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
5631
    \nobreak
5632
    %
5633
    % Output the actual section heading.
5634 82 jeremybenn
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5635 19 jeremybenn
          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
5636
          \unhbox0 #1}%
5637
  }%
5638
  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
5639
  % Don't allow stretch, though.
5640
  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
5641
  %
5642
  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
5643
  % was followed by glue.
5644
  \nobreak
5645
  %
5646
  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
5647
  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
5648
  % discardable item.)
5649
  \vskip-\parskip
5650 82 jeremybenn
  %
5651 19 jeremybenn
  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
5652
  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
5653
  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
5654 82 jeremybenn
  %
5655 19 jeremybenn
  %   @section sec-whatever
5656
  %   @deffn def-whatever
5657
  \penalty 10001
5658
}
5659
 
5660
 
5661
\message{toc,}
5662
% Table of contents.
5663
\newwrite\tocfile
5664
 
5665
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
5666
% Called from @chapter, etc.
5667
%
5668
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
5669
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
5670
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
5671
% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
5672
% destination to jump to.
5673
%
5674
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
5675
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
5676
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
5677
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
5678
%
5679
\newif\iftocfileopened
5680
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
5681
%
5682
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
5683
  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
5684
  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
5685
    \iftocfileopened\else
5686
      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
5687
      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
5688
    \fi
5689
    %
5690
    \iflinks
5691
      {\atdummies
5692
       \edef\temp{%
5693
         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
5694
       \temp
5695
      }%
5696
    \fi
5697
  \fi
5698
  %
5699
  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
5700
  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
5701
  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
5702
  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
5703
  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
5704
  % `1', and two named `2'.
5705
  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
5706
}
5707
 
5708
 
5709
% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
5710
% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
5711
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
5712 82 jeremybenn
%
5713 19 jeremybenn
\def\activecatcodes{%
5714
  \catcode`\"=\active
5715
  \catcode`\$=\active
5716
  \catcode`\<=\active
5717
  \catcode`\>=\active
5718
  \catcode`\\=\active
5719
  \catcode`\^=\active
5720
  \catcode`\_=\active
5721
  \catcode`\|=\active
5722
  \catcode`\~=\active
5723
}
5724
 
5725
 
5726
% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
5727
\def\readtocfile{%
5728
  \setupdatafile
5729
  \activecatcodes
5730
  \input \tocreadfilename
5731
}
5732
 
5733
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
5734
\newcount\savepageno
5735
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
5736
 
5737
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
5738
%
5739
\def\startcontents#1{%
5740
  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
5741
  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
5742
  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
5743
  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
5744
  \contentsalignmacro
5745
  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
5746
  %
5747
  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
5748
  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
5749
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
5750
  %
5751
  \savepageno = \pageno
5752
  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
5753
    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
5754
    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
5755
    %
5756
    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
5757
    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
5758
}
5759
 
5760
% redefined for the two-volume lispref.  We always output on
5761
% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
5762 82 jeremybenn
%
5763 19 jeremybenn
\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
5764
 
5765
% Normal (long) toc.
5766
%
5767
\def\contents{%
5768
  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
5769
    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
5770
    \ifeof 1 \else
5771
      \readtocfile
5772
    \fi
5773
    \vfill \eject
5774
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
5775
    \ifeof 1 \else
5776
      \pdfmakeoutlines
5777
    \fi
5778
    \closein 1
5779
  \endgroup
5780
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
5781
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
5782
}
5783
 
5784
% And just the chapters.
5785
\def\summarycontents{%
5786
  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
5787
    %
5788
    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
5789
    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
5790
    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
5791
    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
5792
    \secfonts
5793
    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
5794
    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
5795
    \rm
5796
    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
5797
    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
5798
    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
5799
    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
5800
    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
5801
    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
5802
    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
5803
    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
5804
    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
5805
    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
5806
    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
5807
    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
5808
    \ifeof 1 \else
5809
      \readtocfile
5810
    \fi
5811
    \closein 1
5812
    \vfill \eject
5813
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
5814
  \endgroup
5815
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
5816
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
5817
}
5818
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
5819
 
5820
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
5821
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
5822
%
5823
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
5824
  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
5825
  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
5826
  % But use \hss just in case.
5827
  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
5828
  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
5829
  %
5830
  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
5831
  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
5832
  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
5833
  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
5834
  % there are before deciding ...
5835
  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
5836
}
5837
 
5838
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
5839
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
5840
% The last argument is the page number.
5841
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
5842
 
5843
% Chapters, in the main contents.
5844
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5845
%
5846
% Chapters, in the short toc.
5847
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
5848
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
5849
  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
5850
}
5851
 
5852
% Appendices, in the main contents.
5853
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
5854
%
5855
\def\appendixbox#1{%
5856
  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
5857
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
5858
  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
5859
%
5860
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5861
 
5862
% Unnumbered chapters.
5863
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
5864
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
5865
 
5866
% Sections.
5867
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5868
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
5869
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
5870
 
5871
% Subsections.
5872
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5873
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
5874
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
5875
 
5876
% And subsubsections.
5877
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5878
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
5879
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
5880
 
5881
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
5882
% Same as \defaultparindent.
5883
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
5884
 
5885
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
5886
% page number.
5887
%
5888
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
5889
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
5890
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
5891
   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
5892
   \begingroup
5893
     \chapentryfonts
5894
     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5895
   \endgroup
5896
   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
5897
}
5898
 
5899
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
5900
  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
5901
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5902
\endgroup}
5903
 
5904
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
5905
  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
5906
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5907
\endgroup}
5908
 
5909
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
5910
  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
5911
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5912
\endgroup}
5913
 
5914
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
5915
\let\tocentry = \entry
5916
 
5917
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
5918
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
5919
 
5920
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
5921
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
5922
 
5923
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
5924
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
5925
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
5926
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
5927
 
5928
 
5929
\message{environments,}
5930
% @foo ... @end foo.
5931
 
5932
% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
5933
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
5934
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
5935
 
5936
\envdef\tex{%
5937 82 jeremybenn
  \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
5938 19 jeremybenn
  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
5939
  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
5940
  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
5941
  \catcode `\%=14
5942
  \catcode `\+=\other
5943
  \catcode `\"=\other
5944
  \catcode `\|=\other
5945
  \catcode `\<=\other
5946
  \catcode `\>=\other
5947 82 jeremybenn
  \catcode`\`=\other
5948
  \catcode`\'=\other
5949 19 jeremybenn
  \escapechar=`\\
5950
  %
5951
  \let\b=\ptexb
5952
  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
5953
  \let\c=\ptexc
5954
  \let\,=\ptexcomma
5955
  \let\.=\ptexdot
5956
  \let\dots=\ptexdots
5957
  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
5958
  \let\!=\ptexexclam
5959
  \let\i=\ptexi
5960
  \let\indent=\ptexindent
5961
  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
5962
  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
5963
  \let\+=\tabalign
5964
  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
5965
  \let\/=\ptexslash
5966
  \let\*=\ptexstar
5967
  \let\t=\ptext
5968 82 jeremybenn
  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % outer
5969 19 jeremybenn
  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
5970
  %
5971
  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
5972
  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
5973
  \def\@{@}%
5974
}
5975
% There is no need to define \Etex.
5976
 
5977
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
5978
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
5979
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
5980
 
5981
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
5982
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
5983
 
5984
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
5985
% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
5986
% have any width.
5987
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
5988
 
5989
% This space is always present above and below environments.
5990
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
5991
 
5992
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
5993
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
5994
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
5995
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
5996
%
5997
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
5998
  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
5999
  % \sectionheading, q.v.
6000
  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
6001
    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
6002
    \endgraf
6003
    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
6004
      \removelastskip
6005
      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
6006
      % or better ...
6007
      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
6008
      \vskip\envskipamount
6009
    \fi
6010
  \fi
6011
}}
6012
 
6013
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
6014
 
6015
% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
6016
% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
6017
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
6018
 
6019
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
6020
% environment contents.
6021
\font\circle=lcircle10
6022
\newdimen\circthick
6023
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
6024
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
6025
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
6026
%
6027
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
6028
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
6029
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
6030
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
6031
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6032
        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
6033
        \hskip\rskip}}
6034
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6035
        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
6036
        \hskip\rskip}}
6037
%
6038
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
6039
 
6040
\envdef\cartouche{%
6041
  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
6042
  \startsavinginserts
6043
  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
6044
  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
6045
  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
6046
  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
6047
  \cartouter=\hsize
6048
  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt  % allow for 3pt kerns on either
6049
                                % side, and for 6pt waste from
6050
                                % each corner char, and rule thickness
6051
  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
6052
  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
6053
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6054
  \vbox\bgroup
6055
      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
6056
      \carttop
6057
      \hbox\bgroup
6058
          \hskip\lskip
6059
          \vrule\kern3pt
6060
          \vbox\bgroup
6061
              \kern3pt
6062
              \hsize=\cartinner
6063
              \baselineskip=\normbskip
6064
              \lineskip=\normlskip
6065
              \parskip=\normpskip
6066
              \vskip -\parskip
6067
              \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
6068
}
6069
\def\Ecartouche{%
6070
              \ifhmode\par\fi
6071
              \kern3pt
6072
          \egroup
6073
          \kern3pt\vrule
6074
          \hskip\rskip
6075
      \egroup
6076
      \cartbot
6077
  \egroup
6078
  \checkinserts
6079
}
6080
 
6081
 
6082
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
6083
% inside a group.
6084 82 jeremybenn
\newdimen\nonfillparindent
6085 19 jeremybenn
\def\nonfillstart{%
6086
  \aboveenvbreak
6087
  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
6088
  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
6089
  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
6090
  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
6091
  \parskip = 0pt
6092 82 jeremybenn
  % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
6093
  % the normal \indent.
6094
  \nonfillparindent=\parindent
6095 19 jeremybenn
  \parindent = 0pt
6096 82 jeremybenn
  \let\indent\nonfillindent
6097
  %
6098 19 jeremybenn
  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
6099
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6100
    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6101
    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
6102
  \else
6103
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6104
  \fi
6105
  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
6106
}
6107
 
6108 82 jeremybenn
\begingroup
6109
\obeyspaces
6110
% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
6111
% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
6112
% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
6113
% @indent.
6114
\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
6115
\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
6116
\ifx\temp %
6117
\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
6118
\else%
6119
\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
6120
\fi%
6121
}%
6122
\endgroup
6123
\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
6124
\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
6125
 
6126 19 jeremybenn
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
6127
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
6128
% This affects the following displayed environments:
6129
%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
6130
%
6131
\def\smallword{small}
6132
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
6133
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
6134
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
6135
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
6136
    % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
6137
    % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
6138
    % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
6139
    % to change the fonts afterward.
6140
    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6141
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
6142
  \fi
6143
}
6144
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
6145
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
6146
  \else
6147
    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6148
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
6149
  \fi
6150
}
6151
 
6152
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
6153
% Let's do it by one command:
6154
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
6155
  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
6156
  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
6157
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6158
  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6159
}
6160
 
6161
% Define two synonyms:
6162
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
6163
  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
6164
  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
6165
}
6166
 
6167
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
6168
%
6169
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
6170
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
6171
%
6172
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
6173
  \nonfillstart
6174 82 jeremybenn
  \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
6175 19 jeremybenn
  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
6176
  \gobble       % eat return
6177
}
6178
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
6179
%
6180
\makedispenv {display}{%
6181
  \nonfillstart
6182
  \gobble
6183
}
6184
 
6185
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
6186
%
6187
\makedispenv{format}{%
6188
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6189
  \nonfillstart
6190
  \gobble
6191
}
6192
 
6193
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
6194
\envdef\flushleft{%
6195
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6196
  \nonfillstart
6197
  \gobble
6198
}
6199
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
6200
 
6201
% @flushright.
6202
%
6203
\envdef\flushright{%
6204
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6205
  \nonfillstart
6206
  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
6207
  \gobble
6208
}
6209
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
6210
 
6211
 
6212 82 jeremybenn
% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
6213
% justification.  From plain.tex.
6214
\envdef\raggedright{%
6215
  \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
6216
}
6217
\let\Eraggedright\par
6218
 
6219
\envdef\raggedleft{%
6220
  \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
6221
  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6222
  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6223
                  % badness reporting.
6224
}
6225
\let\Eraggedleft\par
6226
 
6227
\envdef\raggedcenter{%
6228
  \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
6229
  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6230
  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6231
                  % badness reporting.
6232
}
6233
\let\Eraggedcenter\par
6234
 
6235
 
6236 19 jeremybenn
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
6237
% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
6238
% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
6239
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
6240
%
6241 82 jeremybenn
\def\quotationstart{%
6242 19 jeremybenn
  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
6243
  \parindent=0pt
6244
  %
6245
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
6246
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6247
    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6248
    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
6249
    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
6250
  \else
6251
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6252
  \fi
6253
  \parsearg\quotationlabel
6254
}
6255
 
6256 82 jeremybenn
\envdef\quotation{%
6257
  \setnormaldispenv
6258
  \quotationstart
6259
}
6260
 
6261
\envdef\smallquotation{%
6262
  \setsmalldispenv
6263
  \quotationstart
6264
}
6265
\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation
6266
 
6267 19 jeremybenn
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
6268
% doing normal filling.
6269
%
6270
\def\Equotation{%
6271
  \par
6272
  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
6273
    % indent a bit.
6274
    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
6275
  \fi
6276
  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6277
}
6278
 
6279
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
6280
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
6281
  \def\temp{#1}%
6282
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
6283
    {\bf #1: }%
6284
  \fi
6285
}
6286
 
6287
 
6288
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
6289
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
6290
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
6291
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
6292
%
6293
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
6294
%
6295
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
6296
% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
6297
% verbatim line.
6298
\def\dospecials{%
6299
  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
6300
  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
6301
  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
6302 82 jeremybenn
  % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
6303
  % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
6304
  % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
6305
  %\do\`\do\'%
6306 19 jeremybenn
}
6307
%
6308
% [Knuth] p. 380
6309
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
6310
  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
6311
%
6312
% Setup for the @verb command.
6313
%
6314
% Eight spaces for a tab
6315
\begingroup
6316
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
6317
  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
6318
\endgroup
6319
%
6320
\def\setupverb{%
6321
  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6322
  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
6323 82 jeremybenn
  \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
6324 19 jeremybenn
  \tabeightspaces
6325
  % Respect line breaks,
6326
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
6327
  % make each space count
6328
  % must do in this order:
6329
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6330
}
6331
 
6332
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
6333
%
6334
% Real tab expansion
6335
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
6336
%
6337
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
6338
%
6339
\begingroup
6340
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
6341
  \gdef\tabexpand{%
6342
    \catcode`\^^I=\active
6343
    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
6344
      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
6345
      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
6346
      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
6347
      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
6348
      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
6349
    }%
6350
  }
6351
\endgroup
6352
 
6353
% start the verbatim environment.
6354
\def\setupverbatim{%
6355
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6356
  \nonfillstart
6357
  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6358
  \tt
6359
  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
6360
  \tabexpand
6361 82 jeremybenn
  \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
6362 19 jeremybenn
  % Respect line breaks,
6363
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
6364
  % make each space count
6365
  % must do in this order:
6366
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6367
  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
6368
}
6369
 
6370
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
6371
% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
6372
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
6373
%
6374
%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
6375
%
6376
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
6377
\begingroup
6378
  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
6379
  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
6380
\endgroup
6381
%
6382
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
6383
%
6384
%
6385
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
6386
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
6387
%
6388
%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
6389
%
6390
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
6391
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
6392
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
6393
%
6394
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
6395
%
6396
\begingroup
6397
  \catcode`\ =\active
6398
  \obeylines %
6399
  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
6400
  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
6401
  % line in the output.
6402
  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
6403
  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
6404
  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
6405
\endgroup
6406
%
6407
\envdef\verbatim{%
6408
    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
6409
}
6410
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
6411
 
6412
 
6413
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
6414
%
6415
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
6416
%
6417
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
6418
  {%
6419
    \makevalueexpandable
6420
    \setupverbatim
6421 82 jeremybenn
    \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
6422 19 jeremybenn
    \input #1
6423
    \afterenvbreak
6424
  }%
6425
}
6426
 
6427
% @copying ... @end copying.
6428
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
6429
%
6430
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
6431
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
6432
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
6433
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
6434
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
6435
% possible is very desirable.
6436
%
6437
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
6438
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
6439
%
6440
\def\insertcopying{%
6441
  \begingroup
6442
    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
6443
    \scanexp\copyingtext
6444
  \endgroup
6445
}
6446
 
6447
 
6448
\message{defuns,}
6449
% @defun etc.
6450
 
6451
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
6452
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
6453
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
6454
\newcount\defunpenalty
6455
 
6456
% Start the processing of @deffn:
6457
\def\startdefun{%
6458
  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
6459
    \medbreak
6460
    \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
6461
                        % following @def command, see below.
6462
  \else
6463
    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
6464
    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
6465
    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
6466
    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
6467
    % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
6468
    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
6469
    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
6470
    %
6471
    % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
6472
    % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
6473
    % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
6474
    % @def command.
6475
    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6476
    %
6477
    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
6478
    % But do insert the glue.
6479
    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
6480
  \fi
6481
  %
6482
  \parindent=0in
6483
  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
6484
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6485
}
6486
 
6487
\def\dodefunx#1{%
6488
  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
6489
  \checkenv#1%
6490
  %
6491
  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
6492
  % It's not a great place, though.
6493
  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6494
  %
6495
  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
6496
  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
6497
}
6498
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
6499
 
6500
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
6501
%
6502
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
6503
  \begingroup
6504
    % call \deffnheader:
6505
    #1#2 \endheader
6506
    % common ending:
6507
    \interlinepenalty = 10000
6508
    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
6509
    \endgraf
6510
    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
6511
    \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
6512
    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
6513
    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
6514
    \checkparencounts
6515
  \endgroup
6516
}
6517
 
6518
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
6519
 
6520
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
6521 82 jeremybenn
% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
6522 19 jeremybenn
%
6523
\def\makedefun#1{%
6524
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
6525
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
6526
    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
6527
  \temp
6528
}
6529
 
6530
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
6531
%
6532
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
6533
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
6534
%
6535
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
6536
  \envdef#1{%
6537
    \startdefun
6538
    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
6539
  }%
6540
  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
6541
  \def#3%
6542
}
6543
 
6544
%%% Untyped functions:
6545
 
6546
% @deffn category name args
6547
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
6548
 
6549
% @deffn category class name args
6550
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6551
 
6552
% \defopon {category on}class name args
6553
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6554
 
6555
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
6556
%
6557
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
6558
  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
6559
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
6560
  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
6561
}
6562
 
6563
%%% Typed functions:
6564
 
6565
% @deftypefn category type name args
6566
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
6567
 
6568
% @deftypeop category class type name args
6569
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6570
 
6571
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
6572
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6573
 
6574
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
6575
%
6576
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6577
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6578
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6579
}
6580
 
6581
%%% Typed variables:
6582
 
6583
% @deftypevr category type var args
6584
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
6585
 
6586
% @deftypecv category class type var args
6587
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6588
 
6589
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
6590
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6591
 
6592
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
6593
%
6594
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6595
  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6596
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6597
}
6598
 
6599
%%% Untyped variables:
6600
 
6601
% @defvr category var args
6602
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
6603
 
6604
% @defcv category class var args
6605
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6606
 
6607
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
6608
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
6609
 
6610
%%% Type:
6611
% @deftp category name args
6612
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
6613
  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
6614
  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
6615
}
6616
 
6617
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
6618
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6619
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
6620
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
6621
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6622
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6623
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
6624
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6625
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
6626
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
6627
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6628
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6629
 
6630
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
6631
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
6632
% #2 is the return type, if any.
6633
% #3 is the function name.
6634
%
6635
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
6636
%
6637
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
6638
  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
6639
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
6640
  %
6641
  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
6642
  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
6643
  % just below it.
6644
  \def\temp{#1}%
6645
  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
6646
  %
6647
  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
6648
  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
6649
  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
6650
  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
6651
  % The continuations:
6652
  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
6653
  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
6654
  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
6655
  %
6656
  % Put the type name to the right margin.
6657
  \noindent
6658
  \hbox to 0pt{%
6659
    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
6660
    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
6661
    \kern\leftskip
6662
    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
6663
  }%
6664
  %
6665
  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
6666
  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
6667
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6668
  {%
6669
    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
6670
    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
6671
    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
6672
    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
6673
    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
6674
    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
6675
    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
6676
    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
6677
    \df \tt
6678
    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
6679
    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
6680
    #3% output function name
6681
  }%
6682
  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
6683
  %
6684
  \boldbrax
6685
  % arguments will be output next, if any.
6686
}
6687
 
6688
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
6689
% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
6690
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
6691
% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
6692
%
6693
\def\defunargs#1{%
6694
  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
6695
  % tt for the names.
6696
  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
6697
  %
6698
  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
6699
  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
6700 82 jeremybenn
  \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
6701 19 jeremybenn
  #1%
6702
  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
6703
}
6704
 
6705
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
6706
%
6707
\def\activeparens{%
6708
  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
6709
  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
6710
  \catcode`\&=\active
6711
}
6712
 
6713
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
6714
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
6715
 
6716
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
6717
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
6718
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
6719
{
6720
  \activeparens
6721
  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
6722
  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
6723
  \global\let& = \&
6724
 
6725
  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
6726
  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
6727
}
6728
 
6729
\newcount\parencount
6730
 
6731
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
6732
\newif\ifampseen
6733
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
6734
 
6735
\def\parenfont{%
6736
  \ifampseen
6737
    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
6738
    % otherwise use the default font.
6739
    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
6740
  \else
6741
    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
6742
    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
6743
    \sf
6744
  \fi
6745
}
6746
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
6747
  \ifampseen
6748
    \ifnum\parencount=1
6749
      #1%
6750
    \fi
6751
  \fi
6752
}
6753
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
6754
 
6755
\def\opnr{%
6756
  \global\advance\parencount by 1
6757
  {\parenfont(}%
6758
  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
6759
}
6760
\def\clnr{%
6761
  {\parenfont)}%
6762
  \infirstlevel \sl
6763
  \global\advance\parencount by -1
6764
}
6765
 
6766
\newcount\brackcount
6767
\def\lbrb{%
6768
  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
6769
  {\bf[}%
6770
}
6771
\def\rbrb{%
6772
  {\bf]}%
6773
  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
6774
}
6775
 
6776
\def\checkparencounts{%
6777
  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
6778
  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
6779
}
6780
% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
6781
% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
6782
\def\badparencount{%
6783
  \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
6784
  \global\parencount=0
6785
}
6786
\def\badbrackcount{%
6787
  \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
6788
  \global\brackcount=0
6789
}
6790
 
6791
 
6792
\message{macros,}
6793
% @macro.
6794
 
6795
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
6796
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
6797
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
6798
  \newwrite\macscribble
6799
  \def\scantokens#1{%
6800
    \toks0={#1}%
6801
    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
6802
    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
6803
    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
6804
    \input \jobname.tmp
6805
  }
6806
\fi
6807
 
6808
\def\scanmacro#1{%
6809
  \begingroup
6810
    \newlinechar`\^^M
6811
    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
6812
    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
6813
    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
6814
    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
6815
    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
6816
    % with macro expansion.                             --kasal, 19aug04
6817
    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
6818
    % ... and \example
6819
    \spaceisspace
6820
    %
6821
    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
6822
    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
6823
    %                                                   --kasal, 29nov03
6824
    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
6825
  \endgroup
6826
}
6827
 
6828
\def\scanexp#1{%
6829
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
6830
  \temp
6831
}
6832
 
6833
\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
6834
\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
6835
\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
6836
 
6837
% List of all defined macros in the form
6838
%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
6839
% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
6840
% if there is a need.
6841
\def\macrolist{}
6842
 
6843
% Add the macro to \macrolist
6844
\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
6845
\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
6846
     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
6847
     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
6848
}
6849
 
6850
% Utility routines.
6851
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
6852
%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
6853
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
6854 82 jeremybenn
%
6855 19 jeremybenn
\def\cslet#1#2{%
6856
  \expandafter\let
6857
  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
6858
  \csname#2\endcsname
6859
}
6860
 
6861
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
6862
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
6863
{\catcode`\@=11
6864
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
6865
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
6866
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
6867
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
6868
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
6869
}
6870
 
6871
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
6872
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
6873
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
6874
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
6875
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
6876
}
6877
 
6878
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
6879
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
6880
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
6881
 
6882
% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
6883
% them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
6884
% confine the change to the current group.
6885
 
6886
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
6887
% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
6888
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
6889
 
6890
\def\scanctxt{%
6891
  \catcode`\"=\other
6892
  \catcode`\+=\other
6893
  \catcode`\<=\other
6894
  \catcode`\>=\other
6895
  \catcode`\@=\other
6896
  \catcode`\^=\other
6897
  \catcode`\_=\other
6898
  \catcode`\|=\other
6899
  \catcode`\~=\other
6900
  \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
6901
}
6902
 
6903
\def\scanargctxt{%
6904
  \scanctxt
6905
  \catcode`\\=\other
6906
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
6907
}
6908
 
6909
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
6910
  \scanctxt
6911
  \catcode`\{=\other
6912
  \catcode`\}=\other
6913
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
6914
  \usembodybackslash
6915
}
6916
 
6917
\def\macroargctxt{%
6918
  \scanctxt
6919
  \catcode`\\=\other
6920
}
6921
 
6922
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
6923
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
6924
% where N is the macro parameter number.
6925
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
6926
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
6927
 
6928
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
6929
 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
6930
 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
6931
}
6932
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
6933
 
6934
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
6935
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
6936
 
6937
\def\macroxxx#1{%
6938
  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
6939
  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
6940
     \paramno=0%
6941
  \else
6942
     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
6943
  \fi
6944
  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
6945
     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
6946
  \else
6947
     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
6948
     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
6949
     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
6950
     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
6951
     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
6952
  \fi
6953
  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
6954
  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
6955
  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
6956
  \fi}
6957
 
6958
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
6959
  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
6960
    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
6961
    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
6962
    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
6963
    \begingroup
6964
      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
6965
      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
6966
      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
6967
    \endgroup
6968
  \else
6969
    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
6970
  \fi
6971
}
6972
 
6973
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
6974
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
6975
%
6976
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
6977
  \ifx #1\relax
6978
    % remove this
6979
  \else
6980
    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
6981
  \fi
6982
}
6983
 
6984
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
6985
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
6986
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
6987
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
6988
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
6989
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
6990
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
6991
 
6992
% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
6993
% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
6994
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
6995
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
6996
 
6997
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
6998
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
6999
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
7000
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
7001
%
7002
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
7003
% the macro is used.
7004
 
7005
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
7006
        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
7007
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
7008
  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7009
  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
7010
    \advance\paramno by 1%
7011
    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
7012
        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
7013
    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
7014
  \fi\next}
7015
 
7016
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
7017
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
7018
 
7019
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
7020
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7021
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
7022
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7023
 
7024
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
7025
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
7026
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
7027
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
7028
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
7029
\def\defmacro{%
7030
  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
7031
  \ifrecursive
7032
    \ifcase\paramno
7033
    % 0
7034
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7035
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7036
    \or % 1
7037
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7038
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7039
         \noexpand\braceorline
7040
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7041
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7042
         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7043
    \else % many
7044
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7045
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7046
         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7047
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7048
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7049
      \expandafter\expandafter
7050
      \expandafter\xdef
7051
      \expandafter\expandafter
7052
        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7053
          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7054
    \fi
7055
  \else
7056
    \ifcase\paramno
7057
    % 0
7058
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7059
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7060
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7061
    \or % 1
7062
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7063
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7064
         \noexpand\braceorline
7065
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7066
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7067
        \egroup
7068
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7069
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7070
    \else % many
7071
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7072
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7073
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7074
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7075
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7076
      \expandafter\expandafter
7077
      \expandafter\xdef
7078
      \expandafter\expandafter
7079
      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7080
      \paramlist{%
7081
          \egroup
7082
          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7083
          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7084
    \fi
7085
  \fi}
7086
 
7087
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
7088
 
7089
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
7090
% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
7091
% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
7092
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
7093
\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
7094
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
7095
  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
7096
    \expandafter\parsearg
7097
  \fi \macnamexxx}
7098
 
7099
 
7100
% @alias.
7101
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
7102
% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
7103
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
7104
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
7105
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
7106
  {%
7107
    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
7108
    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
7109
    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
7110
  }%
7111
  \next
7112
}
7113
 
7114
 
7115
\message{cross references,}
7116
 
7117
\newwrite\auxfile
7118
\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
7119
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
7120
 
7121
% @inforef is relatively simple.
7122
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
7123
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
7124
  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
7125
 
7126
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
7127
% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
7128
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
7129
% @node foo , bar , ...
7130
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
7131
%
7132
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
7133
%
7134
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
7135
% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
7136
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
7137
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
7138
 
7139
\let\nwnode=\node
7140
\let\lastnode=\empty
7141
 
7142
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
7143
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
7144
%
7145
\def\donoderef#1{%
7146
  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
7147
    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
7148
    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
7149
  \fi
7150
}
7151
 
7152
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
7153
%
7154
\newcount\savesfregister
7155
%
7156
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
7157
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
7158
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
7159
 
7160
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
7161
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
7162
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
7163
%                 or the anchor name.
7164
% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
7165
%                 empty for anchors.
7166
% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
7167
%
7168
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
7169
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
7170
% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
7171
%
7172
\def\setref#1#2{%
7173
  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
7174
  \iflinks
7175
    {%
7176
      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
7177
      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
7178
        \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
7179
          ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
7180
      }%
7181
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
7182
      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
7183
      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
7184
      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
7185
    }%
7186
  \fi
7187
}
7188
 
7189
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
7190
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
7191
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
7192
% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
7193
%
7194
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7195
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7196
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7197
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
7198
  \unsepspaces
7199
  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
7200
  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
7201
  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
7202
  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
7203
  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
7204
    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
7205
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
7206
      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
7207
      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7208
    \else
7209
      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
7210
      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
7211
      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
7212
        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
7213
        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7214
      \else
7215
        \ifhavexrefs
7216
          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
7217
          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
7218
        \else
7219
          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
7220
          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7221
        \fi%
7222
      \fi
7223
    \fi
7224
  \fi
7225
  %
7226
  % Make link in pdf output.
7227
  \ifpdf
7228
    {\indexnofonts
7229
     \turnoffactive
7230 82 jeremybenn
     % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
7231
     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
7232
     \getfilename{#4}%
7233
     %
7234 19 jeremybenn
     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
7235
     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
7236
      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
7237
     %
7238 82 jeremybenn
     \leavevmode
7239
     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
7240 19 jeremybenn
     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
7241 82 jeremybenn
       goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
7242 19 jeremybenn
     \else
7243 82 jeremybenn
       goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
7244 19 jeremybenn
     \fi
7245
    }%
7246
    \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
7247
  \fi
7248
  %
7249
  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
7250
  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
7251
  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
7252
  {%
7253
    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
7254
    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
7255
    \indexnofonts
7256
    \turnoffactive
7257
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
7258
      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
7259
  }%
7260
  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
7261
    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
7262
    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
7263
    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
7264
      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
7265
    \else
7266
      \printedrefname
7267
    \fi
7268
    %
7269
    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
7270
    % "in MANUALNAME".
7271
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
7272
      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
7273
    \fi
7274
  \else
7275
    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
7276
    %
7277
    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
7278
    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
7279
    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
7280
    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
7281
    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
7282
    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
7283
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
7284
      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
7285
    \else
7286
      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
7287
      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
7288
      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
7289
      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
7290
      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
7291
      {\turnoffactive
7292
       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
7293
       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
7294
       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
7295
       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
7296
      }%
7297
      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
7298
      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
7299
      %
7300
      % But we always want a comma and a space:
7301
      ,\space
7302
      %
7303
      % output the `page 3'.
7304
      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
7305
    \fi
7306
  \fi
7307
  \endlink
7308
\endgroup}
7309
 
7310
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
7311
% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
7312
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
7313
% one that Bob is working on :).
7314
%
7315
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
7316
 
7317
% Things referred to by \setref.
7318
%
7319
\def\Ynothing{}
7320
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
7321
\def\Ynumbered{%
7322
  \ifnum\secno=0
7323
    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
7324
  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
7325
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
7326
  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
7327
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
7328
  \else
7329
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
7330
  \fi\fi\fi
7331
}
7332
\def\Yappendix{%
7333
  \ifnum\secno=0
7334
     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
7335
  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
7336
     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
7337
  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
7338
    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
7339
  \else
7340
    \putwordSection@tie
7341
      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
7342
  \fi\fi\fi
7343
}
7344
 
7345
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
7346
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
7347
%
7348
\def\refx#1#2{%
7349
  {%
7350
    \indexnofonts
7351
    \otherbackslash
7352
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
7353
      \csname XR#1\endcsname
7354
  }%
7355
  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
7356
    % If not defined, say something at least.
7357
    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
7358
    \iflinks
7359
      \ifhavexrefs
7360
        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
7361
      \else
7362
        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
7363
          \global\warnedxrefstrue
7364
          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
7365
        \fi
7366
      \fi
7367
    \fi
7368
  \else
7369
    % It's defined, so just use it.
7370
    \thisrefX
7371
  \fi
7372
  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
7373
}
7374
 
7375
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
7376
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
7377
% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
7378
%
7379
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
7380
  {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
7381
   % implementation are changed to commands like @'e.  Don't let these
7382
   % mess up the control sequence name.
7383
    \indexnofonts
7384
    \turnoffactive
7385
    \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
7386
  }%
7387
  %
7388
  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
7389
  %
7390
  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
7391
  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
7392
    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
7393
    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
7394
      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
7395
    %
7396
    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
7397
    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
7398
      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
7399
    \else
7400
      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
7401
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
7402
    \fi
7403
    %
7404
    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
7405
    % for later use in \listoffloats.
7406
    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
7407
      {\safexrefname}}%
7408
  \fi
7409
}
7410
 
7411
% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
7412
%
7413
\def\tryauxfile{%
7414
  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
7415
  \ifeof 1 \else
7416
    \readdatafile{aux}%
7417
    \global\havexrefstrue
7418
  \fi
7419
  \closein 1
7420
}
7421
 
7422
\def\setupdatafile{%
7423
  \catcode`\^^@=\other
7424
  \catcode`\^^A=\other
7425
  \catcode`\^^B=\other
7426
  \catcode`\^^C=\other
7427
  \catcode`\^^D=\other
7428
  \catcode`\^^E=\other
7429
  \catcode`\^^F=\other
7430
  \catcode`\^^G=\other
7431
  \catcode`\^^H=\other
7432
  \catcode`\^^K=\other
7433
  \catcode`\^^L=\other
7434
  \catcode`\^^N=\other
7435
  \catcode`\^^P=\other
7436
  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
7437
  \catcode`\^^R=\other
7438
  \catcode`\^^S=\other
7439
  \catcode`\^^T=\other
7440
  \catcode`\^^U=\other
7441
  \catcode`\^^V=\other
7442
  \catcode`\^^W=\other
7443
  \catcode`\^^X=\other
7444
  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
7445
  \catcode`\^^[=\other
7446
  \catcode`\^^\=\other
7447
  \catcode`\^^]=\other
7448
  \catcode`\^^^=\other
7449
  \catcode`\^^_=\other
7450
  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
7451
  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
7452
  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
7453
  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
7454
  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
7455
  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
7456
  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
7457
  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
7458
  %
7459
  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
7460
  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
7461
  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
7462
  %
7463
  \catcode`\^=\other
7464
  %
7465
  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
7466
  \catcode`\~=\other
7467
  \catcode`\[=\other
7468
  \catcode`\]=\other
7469
  \catcode`\"=\other
7470
  \catcode`\_=\other
7471
  \catcode`\|=\other
7472
  \catcode`\<=\other
7473
  \catcode`\>=\other
7474
  \catcode`\$=\other
7475
  \catcode`\#=\other
7476
  \catcode`\&=\other
7477
  \catcode`\%=\other
7478
  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
7479
  %
7480
  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
7481
  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
7482
  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
7483
  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
7484
  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
7485
  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
7486
  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
7487
  \catcode`\\=\other
7488
  %
7489
  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
7490
  {%
7491
    \count1=128
7492
    \def\loop{%
7493
      \catcode\count1=\other
7494
      \advance\count1 by 1
7495
      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
7496
    }%
7497
  }%
7498
  %
7499
  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
7500
  \catcode`\{=1
7501
  \catcode`\}=2
7502
  \catcode`\@=0
7503
}
7504
 
7505
\def\readdatafile#1{%
7506
\begingroup
7507
  \setupdatafile
7508
  \input\jobname.#1
7509
\endgroup}
7510
 
7511
 
7512
\message{insertions,}
7513
% including footnotes.
7514
 
7515
\newcount \footnoteno
7516
 
7517
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
7518
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
7519
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
7520
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
7521
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
7522
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
7523
 
7524
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
7525
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
7526
 
7527
{\catcode `\@=11
7528
%
7529
% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
7530
\gdef\footnote{%
7531
  \let\indent=\ptexindent
7532
  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
7533
  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
7534
  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
7535
  %
7536
  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
7537
  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
7538
  \let\@sf\empty
7539
  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
7540
  %
7541
  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
7542
  \unskip
7543
  \thisfootno\@sf
7544
  \dofootnote
7545
}%
7546
 
7547
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
7548
% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
7549
%
7550
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
7551
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
7552
% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
7553
%
7554
\gdef\dofootnote{%
7555
  \insert\footins\bgroup
7556
  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
7557
  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
7558
  % So reset some parameters.
7559
  \hsize=\pagewidth
7560
  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
7561
  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
7562
  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
7563
  \floatingpenalty\@MM
7564
  \leftskip\z@skip
7565
  \rightskip\z@skip
7566
  \spaceskip\z@skip
7567
  \xspaceskip\z@skip
7568
  \parindent\defaultparindent
7569
  %
7570
  \smallfonts \rm
7571
  %
7572
  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
7573
  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
7574
  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
7575
  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
7576
  \let\noindent = \relax
7577
  %
7578
  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
7579
  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
7580
  \everypar = {\hang}%
7581
  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
7582
  %
7583
  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
7584
  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
7585
  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
7586
  \footstrut
7587
  \futurelet\next\fo@t
7588
}
7589
}%end \catcode `\@=11
7590
 
7591
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
7592
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
7593
% would be lost.
7594 82 jeremybenn
% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
7595 19 jeremybenn
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
7596
% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
7597
 
7598
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
7599
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
7600
% out prematurely.
7601
%
7602
\def\startsavinginserts{%
7603
  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
7604
    \let\insert\saveinsert
7605
  \else
7606
    \let\checkinserts\relax
7607
  \fi
7608
}
7609
 
7610
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
7611
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
7612
%
7613
\def\saveinsert#1{%
7614
  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
7615
  \afterassignment\next
7616
  % swallow the left brace
7617
  \let\temp =
7618
}
7619
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
7620
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
7621
 
7622
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
7623
 
7624
\def\placesaveins#1{%
7625
  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
7626
    {\box#1}%
7627
}
7628
 
7629
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
7630
{
7631
  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
7632
  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
7633
}
7634
 
7635
% initialization:
7636
\def\newsaveins #1{%
7637
  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
7638
  \next
7639
}
7640
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
7641
  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
7642
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
7643
    \checksaveins #1}%
7644
}
7645
 
7646
% initialize:
7647
\let\checkinserts\empty
7648
\newsaveins\footins
7649
\newsaveins\margin
7650
 
7651
 
7652
% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
7653
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
7654
%
7655
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
7656
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
7657
% undone and the next image would fail.
7658
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
7659
\ifeof 1 \else
7660
  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
7661
  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
7662
  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
7663
  \input epsf.tex
7664
\fi
7665
\closein 1
7666
%
7667
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
7668
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
7669
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
7670
  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
7671
  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
7672
%
7673
\def\image#1{%
7674
  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
7675
    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
7676
      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
7677
      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
7678
      \global\warnednoepsftrue
7679
    \fi
7680
  \else
7681
    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
7682
  \fi
7683
}
7684
%
7685
% Arguments to @image:
7686
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
7687
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
7688
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
7689
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
7690
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
7691
\newif\ifimagevmode
7692
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
7693
  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
7694
  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
7695
  % If the image is by itself, center it.
7696
  \ifvmode
7697
    \imagevmodetrue
7698 82 jeremybenn
    \nobreak\medskip
7699 19 jeremybenn
    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
7700
    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
7701
    % above and below.
7702
    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
7703
    \nobreak
7704
  \fi
7705
  %
7706 82 jeremybenn
  % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
7707
  % environment such as @quotation is respected.  On the other hand, if
7708
  % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
7709
  \noindent
7710
  %
7711 19 jeremybenn
  % Output the image.
7712
  \ifpdf
7713
    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
7714
  \else
7715
    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
7716
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
7717
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
7718
    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
7719
  \fi
7720
  %
7721 82 jeremybenn
  \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi  % space after the standalone image
7722 19 jeremybenn
\endgroup}
7723
 
7724
 
7725
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
7726
% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
7727
% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
7728
%
7729
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
7730
 
7731
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
7732
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
7733
 
7734
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
7735
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
7736
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
7737
%
7738
% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
7739
% be referable.
7740
%
7741
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
7742
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
7743
%
7744
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
7745
% chapter-level command.
7746
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
7747
%
7748
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
7749
  \let\thiscaption=\empty
7750
  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
7751
  %
7752
  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
7753
  %
7754
  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
7755
  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
7756
  %
7757
  \startsavinginserts
7758
  %
7759
  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
7760
  \par
7761
  %
7762
  \vtop\bgroup
7763
    \def\floattype{#1}%
7764
    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
7765
    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
7766
    %
7767
    \ifx\floattype\empty
7768
      \let\safefloattype=\empty
7769
    \else
7770
      {%
7771
        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
7772
        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
7773
        \indexnofonts
7774
        \turnoffactive
7775
        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
7776
      }%
7777
    \fi
7778
    %
7779
    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
7780
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
7781
      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
7782
      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
7783
      %
7784
      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
7785
      \global\advance\floatno by 1
7786
      %
7787
      {%
7788
        % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
7789
        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
7790
        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
7791
        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
7792
        % lists of floats.
7793
        %
7794
        \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
7795
        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
7796
      }%
7797
    \fi
7798
    %
7799
    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
7800
    \vskip\parskip
7801
    %
7802
    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
7803
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
7804
}
7805
 
7806
% we have these possibilities:
7807
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
7808
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
7809
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
7810
% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
7811
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
7812
% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
7813
% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
7814
% @float & no caption:
7815
%
7816
\def\Efloat{%
7817
    \let\floatident = \empty
7818
    %
7819
    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
7820
    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
7821
    %
7822
    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
7823
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
7824
      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
7825
        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
7826
      \fi
7827
      % the number.
7828
      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
7829
    \fi
7830
    %
7831
    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
7832
    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
7833
    \let\captionline = \floatident
7834
    %
7835
    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
7836
      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
7837
        \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
7838
      \fi
7839
      %
7840
      % caption text.
7841
      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
7842
    \fi
7843
    %
7844
    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
7845
    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
7846
    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
7847
      \vskip.5\parskip
7848
      \captionline
7849
      %
7850
      % Space below caption.
7851
      \vskip\parskip
7852
    \fi
7853
    %
7854
    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
7855
    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
7856
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
7857
      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
7858
      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
7859
      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
7860
      {%
7861
        \atdummies
7862
        %
7863
        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
7864
        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
7865
        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
7866
        \scanexp{%
7867
          \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
7868
            \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
7869
              \thiscaption
7870
            \else
7871
              \thisshortcaption
7872
            \fi
7873
          }%
7874
        }%
7875
        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
7876
          \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
7877
      }%
7878
    \fi
7879
  \egroup  % end of \vtop
7880
  %
7881
  % place the captured inserts
7882
  %
7883
  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
7884
  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
7885
  % float. --kasal, 26may04
7886
  %
7887
  \checkinserts
7888
}
7889
 
7890
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
7891
%
7892
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
7893
  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
7894
}
7895
 
7896
% @caption, @shortcaption
7897
%
7898
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
7899
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
7900
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
7901
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
7902
 
7903
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
7904
% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
7905
\def\getfloatno#1{%
7906
  \ifx#1\relax
7907
      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
7908
      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
7909
      %
7910
      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
7911
      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
7912
        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
7913
  \fi
7914
  \let\floatno#1%
7915
}
7916
 
7917
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
7918
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
7919
% first read the @float command.
7920
%
7921
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
7922
 
7923
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
7924
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
7925
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
7926
 
7927
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
7928
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
7929
% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
7930
%
7931
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
7932
%
7933
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
7934
% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
7935
%
7936
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
7937
  \def\temp{#1}%
7938
  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
7939
  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
7940
}
7941
 
7942
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
7943
%
7944
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
7945
  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
7946
  {%
7947
    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
7948
    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
7949
    \indexnofonts
7950
    \turnoffactive
7951
    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
7952
  }%
7953
  %
7954
  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
7955
  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
7956
    \ifhavexrefs
7957
      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
7958
      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
7959
    \fi
7960
  \else
7961
    \begingroup
7962
      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
7963
      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
7964
      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
7965
    \endgroup
7966
  \fi
7967
}
7968
 
7969
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
7970
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
7971
% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
7972
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
7973
%
7974
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
7975
% they won't appear in the aux file).
7976
%
7977
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
7978
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
7979
  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
7980
  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
7981
  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
7982
  % in pdf output.
7983
  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
7984
  %
7985
  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
7986
  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
7987
  \writeentry
7988
}}
7989
 
7990
 
7991
\message{localization,}
7992
 
7993 82 jeremybenn
% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
7994
% early, just after @documentencoding.  Single argument is the language
7995
% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
7996 19 jeremybenn
%
7997
{
7998
  \catcode`\_ = \active
7999
  \globaldefs=1
8000
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
8001
  \let_=\normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filenames
8002
  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
8003
    % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
8004
    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8005
    \ifeof 1
8006
      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
8007
    \else
8008 82 jeremybenn
      \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8009 19 jeremybenn
      \input txi-#1.tex
8010
    \fi
8011
    \closein 1
8012 82 jeremybenn
  \endgroup % end raw TeX
8013 19 jeremybenn
\endgroup}
8014
%
8015
% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
8016
% try txi-de.tex.
8017 82 jeremybenn
%
8018
\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
8019 19 jeremybenn
  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8020
  \ifeof 1
8021
    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
8022
    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
8023
  \else
8024 82 jeremybenn
    \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8025 19 jeremybenn
    \input txi-#1.tex
8026
  \fi
8027
  \closein 1
8028
}
8029 82 jeremybenn
}% end of special _ catcode
8030 19 jeremybenn
%
8031
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
8032 82 jeremybenn
is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  Putting it in the current
8033
directory should work if nowhere else does.}
8034 19 jeremybenn
 
8035 82 jeremybenn
% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
8036
% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
8037
% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
8038
%
8039
% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
8040
% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
8041
% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
8042
%
8043
% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
8044
% available languages.  This means we can support hyphenation in
8045
% Texinfo, at least to some extent.  (This still doesn't solve the
8046
% accented characters problem.)
8047
%
8048
\catcode`@=11
8049
\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
8050
  % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
8051
  \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
8052
    \message{no patterns for #1}%
8053
  \else
8054
    \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
8055
  \fi
8056
  % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
8057
  \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
8058
  \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
8059
}
8060
 
8061
% Helpers for encodings.
8062 19 jeremybenn
% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
8063
%
8064
\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
8065
   \count255=128
8066
   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8067
      \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
8068
      \advance\count255 by 1
8069
   \repeat
8070
}
8071
 
8072
\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
8073
   \count255=128
8074
   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8075
      \catcode\count255=#1\relax
8076
      \advance\count255 by 1
8077
   \repeat
8078
}
8079
 
8080
% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
8081
% according to the specified encoding.
8082
%
8083
\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
8084
  % Encoding being declared for the document.
8085
  \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
8086
  %
8087
  % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
8088
  % to compare them with \ifx.
8089
  \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
8090
  \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
8091
  \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
8092
  \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
8093
  \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
8094
  %
8095
  \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
8096
     \asciichardefs
8097
  %
8098
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
8099
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8100
     \lattwochardefs
8101
  %
8102 82 jeremybenn
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
8103 19 jeremybenn
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8104
     \latonechardefs
8105
  %
8106
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
8107
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8108
     \latninechardefs
8109
  %
8110
  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
8111
     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8112
     \utfeightchardefs
8113
  %
8114 82 jeremybenn
  \else
8115 19 jeremybenn
    \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
8116
  %
8117
  \fi % utfeight
8118
  \fi % latnine
8119
  \fi % latone
8120
  \fi % lattwo
8121
  \fi % ascii
8122
}
8123
 
8124
% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
8125
% the default font encoding (OT1).
8126 82 jeremybenn
%
8127 19 jeremybenn
\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
8128
 
8129
% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
8130
\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
8131
 
8132
% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
8133
% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
8134
% macros containing the character definitions.
8135
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8136
%
8137
% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
8138
\def\latonechardefs{%
8139 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a0{~}
8140 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
8141 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
8142 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
8143
  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8144
  \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
8145 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
8146 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a7{\S}
8147 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
8148
  \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
8149 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
8150 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
8151 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
8152 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^ad{\-}
8153
  \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
8154 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^af{\={}}
8155
  %
8156
  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8157
  \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
8158
  \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
8159
  \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
8160
  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
8161
  \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
8162
  \gdef^^b6{\P}
8163
  %
8164
  \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
8165
  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8166
  \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
8167
  \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
8168
  %
8169 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
8170 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
8171
  \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
8172
  \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
8173
  \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
8174
  %
8175
  \gdef^^c0{\`A}
8176
  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
8177
  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
8178
  \gdef^^c3{\~A}
8179
  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
8180 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
8181 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^c6{\AE}
8182
  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
8183
  \gdef^^c8{\`E}
8184
  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
8185
  \gdef^^ca{\^E}
8186
  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
8187
  \gdef^^cc{\`I}
8188
  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
8189
  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
8190
  \gdef^^cf{\"I}
8191
  %
8192 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
8193 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^d1{\~N}
8194
  \gdef^^d2{\`O}
8195
  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
8196
  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
8197
  \gdef^^d5{\~O}
8198
  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
8199
  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
8200
  \gdef^^d8{\O}
8201
  \gdef^^d9{\`U}
8202
  \gdef^^da{\'U}
8203
  \gdef^^db{\^U}
8204
  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
8205
  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
8206 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^de{\TH}
8207 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^df{\ss}
8208
  %
8209
  \gdef^^e0{\`a}
8210
  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
8211
  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
8212
  \gdef^^e3{\~a}
8213
  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
8214
  \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
8215
  \gdef^^e6{\ae}
8216
  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
8217
  \gdef^^e8{\`e}
8218
  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
8219
  \gdef^^ea{\^e}
8220
  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
8221
  \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
8222
  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
8223
  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
8224
  \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
8225
  %
8226 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
8227 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^f1{\~n}
8228
  \gdef^^f2{\`o}
8229
  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
8230
  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
8231
  \gdef^^f5{\~o}
8232
  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
8233
  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
8234
  \gdef^^f8{\o}
8235
  \gdef^^f9{\`u}
8236
  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
8237
  \gdef^^fb{\^u}
8238
  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
8239
  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
8240 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^fe{\th}
8241 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^ff{\"y}
8242
}
8243
 
8244
% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
8245
\def\latninechardefs{%
8246
  % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
8247
  \latonechardefs
8248
  %
8249
  \gdef^^a4{\euro}
8250
  \gdef^^a6{\v S}
8251
  \gdef^^a8{\v s}
8252
  \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
8253
  \gdef^^b8{\v z}
8254
  \gdef^^bc{\OE}
8255
  \gdef^^bd{\oe}
8256
  \gdef^^be{\"Y}
8257
}
8258
 
8259
% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
8260
\def\lattwochardefs{%
8261
  \gdef^^a0{~}
8262 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
8263 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
8264
  \gdef^^a3{\L}
8265
  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8266
  \gdef^^a5{\v L}
8267
  \gdef^^a6{\'S}
8268
  \gdef^^a7{\S}
8269
  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
8270
  \gdef^^a9{\v S}
8271
  \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
8272
  \gdef^^ab{\v T}
8273
  \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
8274
  \gdef^^ad{\-}
8275
  \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
8276
  \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
8277
  %
8278
  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8279 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
8280
  \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
8281 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^b3{\l}
8282
  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
8283
  \gdef^^b5{\v l}
8284
  \gdef^^b6{\'s}
8285
  \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
8286
  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8287
  \gdef^^b9{\v s}
8288
  \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
8289
  \gdef^^bb{\v t}
8290
  \gdef^^bc{\'z}
8291
  \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
8292
  \gdef^^be{\v z}
8293
  \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
8294
  %
8295
  \gdef^^c0{\'R}
8296
  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
8297
  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
8298
  \gdef^^c3{\u A}
8299
  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
8300
  \gdef^^c5{\'L}
8301
  \gdef^^c6{\'C}
8302
  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
8303
  \gdef^^c8{\v C}
8304
  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
8305 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
8306 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
8307
  \gdef^^cc{\v E}
8308
  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
8309
  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
8310
  \gdef^^cf{\v D}
8311
  %
8312 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
8313 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^d1{\'N}
8314
  \gdef^^d2{\v N}
8315
  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
8316
  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
8317
  \gdef^^d5{\H O}
8318
  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
8319
  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
8320
  \gdef^^d8{\v R}
8321 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
8322 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^da{\'U}
8323
  \gdef^^db{\H U}
8324
  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
8325
  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
8326
  \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
8327
  \gdef^^df{\ss}
8328
  %
8329
  \gdef^^e0{\'r}
8330
  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
8331
  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
8332
  \gdef^^e3{\u a}
8333
  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
8334
  \gdef^^e5{\'l}
8335
  \gdef^^e6{\'c}
8336
  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
8337
  \gdef^^e8{\v c}
8338
  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
8339 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
8340 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
8341
  \gdef^^ec{\v e}
8342
  \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
8343
  \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
8344
  \gdef^^ef{\v d}
8345
  %
8346 82 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
8347 19 jeremybenn
  \gdef^^f1{\'n}
8348
  \gdef^^f2{\v n}
8349
  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
8350
  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
8351
  \gdef^^f5{\H o}
8352
  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
8353
  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
8354
  \gdef^^f8{\v r}
8355
  \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
8356
  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
8357
  \gdef^^fb{\H u}
8358
  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
8359
  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
8360
  \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
8361
  \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
8362
}
8363
 
8364
% UTF-8 character definitions.
8365 82 jeremybenn
%
8366 19 jeremybenn
% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
8367
% changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
8368
% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
8369 82 jeremybenn
%
8370 19 jeremybenn
\newcount\countUTFx
8371
\newcount\countUTFy
8372
\newcount\countUTFz
8373
 
8374
\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
8375
   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
8376
%
8377
\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
8378
   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
8379
%
8380
\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
8381
   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
8382
 
8383
\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
8384
  \ifx #1\relax
8385
    \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
8386
  \else
8387
    \expandafter #1%
8388
  \fi
8389
}
8390
 
8391
\begingroup
8392
  \catcode`\~13
8393
  \catcode`\"12
8394
 
8395
  \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
8396
    \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
8397
    \uccode`\~\countUTFx
8398
    \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
8399
    \advance\countUTFx by 1
8400
    \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
8401
      \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
8402
    \fi}
8403
 
8404
  \countUTFx = "C2
8405
  \countUTFy = "E0
8406
  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
8407
    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
8408
  \UTFviiiLoop
8409
 
8410
  \countUTFx = "E0
8411
  \countUTFy = "F0
8412
  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
8413
    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
8414
  \UTFviiiLoop
8415
 
8416
  \countUTFx = "F0
8417
  \countUTFy = "F4
8418
  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
8419
    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
8420
  \UTFviiiLoop
8421
\endgroup
8422
 
8423
\begingroup
8424
  \catcode`\"=12
8425
  \catcode`\<=12
8426
  \catcode`\.=12
8427
  \catcode`\,=12
8428
  \catcode`\;=12
8429
  \catcode`\!=12
8430
  \catcode`\~=13
8431
 
8432
  \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
8433
    \countUTFz = "#1\relax
8434
    \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
8435
    \begingroup
8436
      \parseXMLCharref
8437
      \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
8438
        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
8439
      \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
8440
        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
8441
      \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
8442
        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
8443
      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
8444
       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
8445
       \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
8446
    \endgroup}
8447
 
8448
  \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
8449
    \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
8450
      \errhelp = \EMsimple
8451
      \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
8452
    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
8453
      \parseUTFviiiA,%
8454
      \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
8455
    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
8456
      \parseUTFviiiA;%
8457
      \parseUTFviiiA,%
8458
      \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
8459
    \else
8460
      \parseUTFviiiA;%
8461
      \parseUTFviiiA,%
8462
      \parseUTFviiiA!%
8463
      \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
8464
    \fi\fi\fi
8465
  }
8466
 
8467
  \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
8468
    \countUTFx = \countUTFz
8469
    \divide\countUTFz by 64
8470
    \countUTFy = \countUTFz
8471
    \multiply\countUTFz by 64
8472
    \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
8473
    \advance\countUTFx by 128
8474
    \uccode `#1\countUTFx
8475
    \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
8476
 
8477
  \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
8478
    \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
8479
    \uccode `#3\countUTFz
8480
    \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
8481
\endgroup
8482
 
8483
\def\utfeightchardefs{%
8484
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
8485
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
8486
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
8487
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
8488
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
8489
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
8490
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
8491
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
8492
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
8493
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
8494
 
8495
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
8496
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
8497
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
8498
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
8499
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
8500
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
8501
 
8502
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
8503
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
8504
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
8505
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
8506
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
8507
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
8508
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
8509
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
8510
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
8511
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
8512
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
8513
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
8514
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
8515
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
8516
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
8517
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
8518
 
8519 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
8520 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
8521
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
8522
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
8523
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
8524
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
8525
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
8526
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
8527
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
8528
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
8529
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
8530
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
8531
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
8532 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
8533 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
8534
 
8535
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
8536
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
8537
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
8538
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
8539
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
8540
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
8541
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
8542
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
8543
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
8544
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
8545
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
8546
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
8547
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
8548
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
8549
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
8550
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
8551
 
8552 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
8553 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
8554
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
8555
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
8556
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
8557
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
8558
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
8559
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
8560
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
8561
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
8562
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
8563
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
8564
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
8565 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
8566 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
8567
 
8568
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
8569
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
8570
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
8571
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
8572 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
8573
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
8574 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
8575
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
8576
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
8577
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
8578 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
8579
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
8580 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
8581
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
8582
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
8583
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
8584
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
8585
 
8586
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
8587
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
8588
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
8589
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
8590
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
8591
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
8592
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
8593
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
8594
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
8595
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
8596
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
8597
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
8598
 
8599
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
8600
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
8601
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
8602
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
8603
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
8604
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
8605
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
8606
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
8607
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
8608
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
8609
 
8610
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
8611
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
8612
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
8613
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
8614
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
8615
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
8616
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
8617
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
8618
 
8619
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
8620
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
8621
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
8622
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
8623
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
8624
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
8625
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
8626
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
8627
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
8628
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
8629
 
8630
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
8631
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
8632
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
8633
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
8634
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
8635
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
8636
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
8637
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
8638
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
8639
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
8640
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
8641
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
8642
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
8643
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
8644
 
8645
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
8646
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
8647
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
8648
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
8649
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
8650
 
8651
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
8652
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
8653
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
8654
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
8655
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
8656
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
8657
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
8658
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
8659
 
8660
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
8661
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
8662
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
8663
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
8664
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
8665
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
8666
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
8667
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
8668
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
8669
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
8670
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
8671
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
8672
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
8673
 
8674
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
8675
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
8676
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
8677
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
8678
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
8679
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
8680
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
8681
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
8682
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
8683
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
8684
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
8685
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
8686
 
8687
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
8688
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
8689
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
8690
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
8691
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
8692
 
8693
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
8694
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
8695
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
8696
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
8697
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
8698
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
8699
 
8700
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
8701
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
8702
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
8703
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
8704
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
8705
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
8706
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
8707
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
8708
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
8709
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
8710
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
8711
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
8712
 
8713
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
8714
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
8715
 
8716
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
8717
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
8718
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
8719
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
8720
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
8721
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
8722
 
8723
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
8724
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
8725
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
8726
 
8727 82 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
8728
 
8729 19 jeremybenn
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
8730
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
8731
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
8732
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
8733
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
8734
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
8735
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
8736
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
8737
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
8738
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
8739
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
8740
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
8741
 
8742
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
8743
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
8744
 
8745
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
8746
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
8747
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
8748
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
8749
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
8750
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
8751
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
8752
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
8753
 
8754
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
8755
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
8756
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
8757
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
8758
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
8759
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
8760
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
8761
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
8762
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
8763
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
8764
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
8765
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
8766
 
8767
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
8768
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
8769
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
8770
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
8771
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
8772
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
8773
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
8774
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
8775
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
8776
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
8777
 
8778
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
8779
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
8780
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
8781
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
8782
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
8783
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
8784
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
8785
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
8786
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
8787
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
8788
 
8789
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
8790
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
8791
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
8792
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
8793
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
8794
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
8795
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
8796
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
8797
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
8798
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
8799
 
8800
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
8801
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
8802
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
8803
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
8804
 
8805
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
8806
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
8807
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
8808
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
8809
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
8810
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
8811
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
8812
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
8813
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
8814
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
8815
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
8816
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
8817
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
8818
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
8819
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
8820
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
8821
 
8822
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
8823
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
8824
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
8825
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
8826
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
8827
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
8828
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
8829
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
8830
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
8831
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
8832
 
8833
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
8834
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
8835
 
8836
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
8837
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
8838
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
8839
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
8840
 
8841
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
8842
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
8843
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
8844
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
8845
 
8846
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
8847
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
8848
 
8849
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
8850
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
8851
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
8852
 
8853
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
8854
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
8855
 
8856
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
8857
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
8858
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
8859
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
8860
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
8861
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
8862
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
8863
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
8864
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
8865
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
8866
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
8867
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
8868
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
8869
 
8870
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
8871
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
8872
 
8873
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
8874
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
8875
  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
8876
}% end of \utfeightchardefs
8877
 
8878
 
8879
% US-ASCII character definitions.
8880
\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
8881
   \relax
8882
}
8883
 
8884
% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
8885
% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
8886
% document encoding.
8887
%
8888
\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
8889
 
8890
 
8891
\message{formatting,}
8892
 
8893
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
8894
 
8895
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
8896
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
8897
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
8898
 
8899
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
8900
\vbadness = 10000
8901
 
8902
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
8903
\hbadness = 2000
8904
 
8905
% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
8906
\widowpenalty=10000
8907
\clubpenalty=10000
8908
 
8909
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
8910
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
8911
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
8912
% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
8913
%
8914
\def\setemergencystretch{%
8915
  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
8916
    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
8917
    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
8918
  \else
8919
    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
8920
  \fi
8921
}
8922
 
8923
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
8924
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
8925
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
8926
%
8927
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
8928
% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
8929
%
8930
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
8931
  \voffset = #3\relax
8932
  \topskip = #6\relax
8933
  \splittopskip = \topskip
8934
  %
8935
  \vsize = #1\relax
8936
  \advance\vsize by \topskip
8937
  \outervsize = \vsize
8938
  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
8939
  \pageheight = \vsize
8940
  %
8941
  \hsize = #2\relax
8942
  \outerhsize = \hsize
8943
  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
8944
  \pagewidth = \hsize
8945
  %
8946
  \normaloffset = #4\relax
8947
  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
8948
  %
8949
  \ifpdf
8950
    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
8951
    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
8952
    % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
8953
    % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
8954
    \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
8955
    \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
8956
  \fi
8957
  %
8958
  \setleading{\textleading}
8959
  %
8960
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
8961
  \setemergencystretch
8962
}
8963
 
8964
% @letterpaper (the default).
8965
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
8966
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
8967
  \textleading = 13.2pt
8968
  %
8969
  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
8970
  \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
8971
                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
8972
                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
8973
                    {11in}{8.5in}%
8974
}}
8975
 
8976
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
8977
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
8978
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
8979
  \textleading = 12pt
8980
  %
8981
  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
8982
                    {-.2in}{0in}%
8983
                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
8984
                    {9.25in}{7in}%
8985
  %
8986
  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
8987
  \tolerance = 700
8988
  \hfuzz = 1pt
8989
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
8990
  \defbodyindent = .5cm
8991
}}
8992
 
8993
% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
8994
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
8995
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
8996
  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
8997
  \textleading = 12pt
8998
  %
8999
  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
9000
                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
9001
                    {0pt}{14pt}%
9002
                    {9in}{6in}%
9003
  %
9004
  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
9005
  \tolerance = 700
9006
  \hfuzz = 1pt
9007
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9008
  \defbodyindent = .4cm
9009
}}
9010
 
9011
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
9012
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9013
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9014
  \textleading = 13.2pt
9015
  %
9016
  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
9017
  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
9018
  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
9019
  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
9020
  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
9021
  % your texinfo source file like this:
9022
  % @tex
9023
  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
9024
  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
9025
  % @end tex
9026
  \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
9027
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9028
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9029
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
9030
  %
9031
  \tolerance = 700
9032
  \hfuzz = 1pt
9033
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9034
  \defbodyindent = 5mm
9035
}}
9036
 
9037
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
9038
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
9039
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
9040
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9041
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
9042
  \textleading = 12.5pt
9043
  %
9044
  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
9045
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9046
                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
9047
                    {210mm}{148mm}%
9048
  %
9049
  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
9050
  \tolerance = 800
9051
  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
9052
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9053
  \defbodyindent = 2mm
9054
  \tableindent = 12mm
9055
}}
9056
 
9057
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
9058
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
9059
  \afourpaper
9060
  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
9061
                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
9062
                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9063
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
9064
  %
9065
  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
9066
  \globaldefs = 0
9067
}}
9068
 
9069
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
9070
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
9071
  \afourpaper
9072
  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
9073
                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
9074
                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9075
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
9076
  \globaldefs = 0
9077
}}
9078
 
9079
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
9080
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
9081
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
9082
%
9083
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
9084
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
9085
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
9086
  \globaldefs = 1
9087
  %
9088
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9089
  \setleading{\textleading}%
9090
  %
9091
  \dimen0 = #1\relax
9092
  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
9093
  %
9094
  \dimen2 = \hsize
9095
  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
9096
  %
9097
  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
9098
                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
9099
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9100
                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
9101
}}
9102
 
9103
% Set default to letter.
9104
%
9105
\letterpaper
9106
 
9107
 
9108
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
9109
 
9110 82 jeremybenn
% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
9111
\catcode`\^^? = 14
9112
 
9113 19 jeremybenn
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
9114
\catcode`\"=\other
9115
\catcode`\~=\other
9116
\catcode`\^=\other
9117
\catcode`\_=\other
9118
\catcode`\|=\other
9119
\catcode`\<=\other
9120
\catcode`\>=\other
9121
\catcode`\+=\other
9122
\catcode`\$=\other
9123
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
9124
\def\normaltilde{~}
9125
\def\normalcaret{^}
9126
\def\normalunderscore{_}
9127
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
9128
\def\normalless{<}
9129
\def\normalgreater{>}
9130
\def\normalplus{+}
9131
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
9132
 
9133
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
9134
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
9135
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
9136
%
9137
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
9138
% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
9139
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
9140
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
9141
%
9142
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9143
 
9144
% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
9145
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
9146
% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
9147
% this is not a problem.
9148
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9149
 
9150
% Turn off all special characters except @
9151
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
9152
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
9153
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
9154
 
9155
\catcode`\"=\active
9156
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
9157
\let"=\activedoublequote
9158
\catcode`\~=\active
9159
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
9160
\chardef\hat=`\^
9161
\catcode`\^=\active
9162
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
9163
 
9164
\catcode`\_=\active
9165
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
9166
\let\realunder=_
9167
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
9168
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
9169
 
9170
\catcode`\|=\active
9171
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
9172
\chardef \less=`\<
9173
\catcode`\<=\active
9174
\def<{{\tt \less}}
9175
\chardef \gtr=`\>
9176
\catcode`\>=\active
9177
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
9178
\catcode`\+=\active
9179
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
9180
\catcode`\$=\active
9181
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
9182
 
9183
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
9184
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
9185
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
9186
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
9187
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
9188
 
9189
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
9190
% parsing them.
9191
\def\turnoffactive{%
9192
  \normalturnoffactive
9193
  \otherbackslash
9194
}
9195
 
9196
\catcode`\@=0
9197
 
9198
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
9199
% as in \char`\\.
9200
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
9201
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
9202
 
9203
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
9204
% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
9205
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
9206
 
9207
% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
9208
% in fixed width font.
9209
\catcode`\\=\active
9210
@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
9211
% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
9212
%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
9213
 
9214
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
9215
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
9216
% catcode other.
9217
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
9218
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
9219
 
9220
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
9221
% the literal character `\'.
9222 82 jeremybenn
%
9223 19 jeremybenn
@def@normalturnoffactive{%
9224
  @let\=@normalbackslash
9225
  @let"=@normaldoublequote
9226
  @let~=@normaltilde
9227
  @let^=@normalcaret
9228
  @let_=@normalunderscore
9229
  @let|=@normalverticalbar
9230
  @let<=@normalless
9231
  @let>=@normalgreater
9232
  @let+=@normalplus
9233
  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
9234 82 jeremybenn
  @markupsetuplqdefault
9235
  @markupsetuprqdefault
9236 19 jeremybenn
  @unsepspaces
9237
}
9238
 
9239
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
9240
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
9241
@otherifyactive
9242
 
9243
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
9244
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
9245
% a backslash.
9246
%
9247
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
9248
@global@let\ = @eatinput
9249
 
9250
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
9251
% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
9252
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
9253
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
9254
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
9255
%
9256
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
9257
  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
9258
  @catcode`+=@active
9259
  @catcode`@_=@active
9260
}
9261
 
9262
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
9263
@escapechar = `@@
9264
 
9265
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
9266
@catcode`@& = @other
9267
@catcode`@# = @other
9268
@catcode`@% = @other
9269
 
9270 82 jeremybenn
@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
9271
@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
9272
@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
9273
@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
9274
@catcode`@'=@active
9275
@catcode`@`=@active
9276
@markupsetuplqdefault
9277
@markupsetuprqdefault
9278 19 jeremybenn
 
9279
@c Local variables:
9280
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
9281
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
9282
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
9283
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
9284
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
9285
@c End:
9286
 
9287
@c vim:sw=2:
9288
 
9289
@ignore
9290
   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
9291
@end ignore

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.